Ge Af300 LV VFD

GE Consumer & Industrial

Product Service Engineering
41 Woodford Avenue
Plainville, CT USA
T 1 800 533 5885 USA
+1 540 378 3280 International
F +1 540 387 8606
+ indicates international access code is required when calling from outside the United States of America
AF-300 G11 Users Guide
AF-300 G11
Users Guide
GEI-100363D
GEI-100363D
Supersedes GEI-100363C
070725
FERGADV
2007 by GE Drives, Inc.

All rights reserved.
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide every possible
contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. If further information is desired, or if particular
problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purpose, the matter should be referred to GE
Drives, Plainville, CT USA.
This document contains proprietary information of GE Drives and is furnished to its customer solely to assist that
customer in the installation, testing, operation, and/or maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall
not be reproduced in whole or in part, nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party without the written
approval of GE Drives.
AF-300 G11 is a trademark of GE Drives, Inc.

Energy $aver is a registered trademark of General Electric Company, USA.
Genius is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Profibus is a trademark of Profibus International.
X$D is a trademark of General Electric Company, USA.
Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives
Notes
Table of Contents
i. Preface
Safety Instructions .................................................. iii
Model Numbering System Diagram ....................... vii
Dimensions & Weights .......................................... viii
1. Before Using This Product ................................ 1-1
Receiving Instructions.......................................... 1-1
Appearance .......................................................... 1-1
Handling the Product ........................................... 1-2
Carrying ............................................................... 1-3
Storage ................................................................ 1-3
Ratings Efficiency and Watts Loss ...................... 1-4
2. Installation Environment and Connection ....... 2-1
Operating Environment ........................................ 2-1
Installation Method .............................................. 2-1
Connection........................................................... 2-3
Basic Connection Diagrams ........................... 2-4
Connecting the Main Circuit and
Ground Terminals ....................................... 2-8
Connecting the Control Terminals ................ 2-11
Terminal Configuration .................................. 2-15
Cable Size, Tightening Torque &
Circuit Protection Rating .......................... 2-16
DC Link Reactor ........................................... 2-17
3. Operation ............................................................ 3-1
Inspection and Preparation Before Operation ..... 3-1
Operation Method ................................................ 3-1
Trial Run ............................................................... 3-1
4. Keypad Panel ..................................................... 4-1
Appearance of Keypad Panel .............................. 4-1
Operation From the Keypad Panel
(LCD Screen, Level Structure) .................... 4-2
Normal Operation ........................................... 4-2
Alarm Modes .................................................. 4-2
Entering Data on the Keypad Panel .................... 4-4
Operation Mode .............................................. 4-4
Setting Digital Frequency ............................... 4-4
Switching to LED Digital Monitor .................... 4-5
Program Menu Screen .................................... 4-5
Setting Function Data ..................................... 4-5

Checking Function Data ................................. 4-7
Monitoring Operating Status .......................... 4-7
I/O Check ........................................................ 4-8
Maintenance Information ................................ 4-9
Load Rate Measurement .............................. 4-10
Alarm Information ......................................... 4-11
Alarm History and Factors ............................ 4-12
Data Copy ..................................................... 4-13
Alarm Mode .................................................. 4-15
5. Function Selection ............................................. 5-1
Function Select List ............................................. 5-1
Alphabetical Function List ................................... 5-5
Function Explanation ........................................... 5-7
6. Protective Operations ........................................ 6-1
List of Protective Functions ................................. 6-1
Alarm Reset ......................................................... 6-2
7. Troubleshooting ................................................. 7-1
Activation of Protective Function ......................... 7-1
Abnormal Motor Rotation .................................... 7-5
8. Maintenance and Inspection ............................ 8-1
Daily Inspections .................................................. 8-1
Periodic Inspections ............................................ 8-1
Main Circuit Measurements ................................. 8-4
Insulation Test ...................................................... 8-5
Replacement Parts .............................................. 8-5
9. Warranty Parts and Service .............................. 9-1
In-Warranty Failure Checklist ............................... 9-2
10. Replacement Parts .......................................... 10-1
11. Specifications ................................................... 11-1
Standard Specifications ..................................... 11-1

Common Specifications..................................... 11-3
Outline Dimensions ............................................ 11-5
Keypad Mounting Hole .................................... 11-12
12. RS485 Modbus RTU Serial Communication . 12-1
Transmission Specification ................................ 12-1
Connection......................................................... 12-1
Serial Interface Configuration ............................ 12-1
Modbus RTU Functions ..................................... 12-1
Drive function Code Access .............................. 12-2
Command and Monitor Data Registers ............. 12-2
Data Format Specification ................................. 12-4
Communication Errors ....................................... 12-8
13. Options .............................................................. 13-1
Built-in Options .................................................. 13-1
14. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............ 14-1
General............................................................... 14-1
Recommended Installation Instructions ............ 14-1
ii
Safety Instructions
Read this manual carefully before installing, connecting (wiring), operating, servicing, or inspecting the drive.
Familiarize yourself with all safety features before using the drive.
In this manual, safety messages are classified as follows:
WARNING
Improper operation may result in serious personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Improper operation may result in slight to medium personal injury or property damage.
Situations more serious than those covered by CAUTION will depend on prevailing circumstances.
Always follow instructions.
Instructions on Use
WARNING
This drive is designed to drive a 3-phase induction motor and is not suitable for a single-phase motor or
others, as fire may result.
This drive may not be used as a component of a life-support system or other medical device directly
affecting the personal welfare of the user.
This drive is manufactured under strict quality control standards. However, safety equipment must be
installed or the failure of this device may result in personal injury, property damage, or if there is a risk
of accident.
Instructions on Installation
WARNING
Mount this drive on an incombustible material such as metal. There is a risk of fire.
Do not place combustible or flammable material near this drive, as fire may result.
CAUTION
Do not hold or carry this drive by its cover. Do not drop the converter, as injury may result.
Ensure that the drive and heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter (lint, paper dust, small chips of
wood or metal, and dust), as fire or accident may result.
Do not install or operate a damaged drive or a drive with missing parts, as electric shock or
injury may occur.
iii
Instructions on Wiring
WARNING
Connect the drive to power via a line-protection molded-case circuit breaker or fuse, as fire may result.
Always connect a ground wire, as electric shock or fire may result.
A licensed specialist must perform all wiring work, as electric shock may result.
Turn off the power before wiring, as electric shock may result.
Wire the drive after installation is complete, as electric shock or injury may occur.
CAUTION
Confirm that the phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply,
as injury may result.
Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, and W), as injury may result.
Do not directly connect a braking resistor to the DC terminals (P(+) and N(-)), as fire may result.
Ensure that the noise generated by the drive, motor, or wiring does not adversely affect peripheral
sensors and equipment, as accident may result.
Instructions on Operation
WARNING
Be sure to install the cover before turning on the power (closed). Do not remove the cover while power to
the drive is turned on. Electric shock may occur.
Do not operate switches with wet hands, as electric shock may result. When the retry function is selected,
the drive may restart automatically after tripping. Design the machine to ensure personal safety in the
event of restart. Accident may result.
When the torque limiting function is selected, operating conditions may differ from preset conditions
(acceleration/deceleration time or speed). In this case, personal safety must be assured.
Accident may result.
The STOP key is only effective when a function setting has been established. Install an independent
emergency switch to disable the STOP key on the keypad panel when an operation is selected via the
external signal terminal. Accident may result.
Operations can start up suddenly, after the alarm is reset, if there is a running signal input.
Confirm that the running signal input is not present before resetting the alarm. Accident may result.
Do not touch drive terminals when energized, even if the drive has stopped. Electric shock may result.
CAUTION
Do not start or stop the drive using the main circuit power. Failure may result.
Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot. Burns may result.
Since the drive can reach high speed operation easily, carefully check the performance of motor or
machine before changing any speed settings. Injury may result.
Do not use the drive braking function for mechanical holding. Injury may result.
iv
Instructions on Maintenance, Inspection, and Replacement
WARNING
Wait a minimum of five minutes (30HP or less) or ten minutes (40HP or more) after power has been turned
off (open) before starting inspection. Also confirm that the charge lamp is off and that DC voltage between
terminals P(+) and N(-) does not exceed 25V. Electrical shock may result.
Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance, inspection, and replacement operations.
Remove all metal jewelry such as watches and rings. Use insulated tools only. Electric shock or injury
may result.
Instructions on Disposal
CAUTION
Treat as industrial waste when disposing of drive. Injury may result.
Instructions for UL/cUL Requirements
CAUTION
Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before working on this control.
Dangerous voltage exist until charge light is off.
Type1 - indoor use only.
Tightening torque and wire size for field wiring terminal are marked adjacent to the terminal or on
the wiring diagram.
The drive shall be connected with Listed Class J Fuse or Circuit Breaker rated 600V as shown in the
Table 2-3-5 (30 HP or less).
In case of using auxiliary control-power input, connect it by referring to the basic connection
diagram (2-3-1).
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes,
for 230V , 460V.
Use 60/75 C CU wire only.
A Class 2 circuit wired with Class 1 wire (30HP or less). Use Class 1 wire only (40HP or more).
Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop terminal connector
sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector
manufacture.
Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model.
Other Instructions
WARNING
Never modify the product. Electric shock or injury may result.
Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe
CAUTION
The contact capacity of alarm output for any fault (30A, B, C) and relay signal output (Y5A, Y5C) is
0.5A at 48V DC, 0.3A 250 VAC
The ground terminal (G) should be connected to ground. Use a crimp terminal to connect a cable to
the main circuit terminal or drive ground terminal.
Where a residual-current protective device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect
contact, only a type B device is allowed on the supply side of this electrical equipment. Otherwise,
another protective measure shall be applied such as separation of the electrical equipment from the
environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation of the electrical equipment and supply
system by the transformer.
Use a single cable to connect the (G) drive ground terminal. Do not use two or more drive ground
terminals.
Use a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) that conform to EN or IEC
standards.
Operate the drive under over-voltage Category III conditions and maintain Pollution Degree 2 or
better as specified in IEC664. To maintain Pollution Degree 2 or better, install the drive in a control
panel structure (level NEMA 3 or higher) which is free from water, oil, carbon, dust, etc.
For the input-output wiring of the drive, use cable diameter and type as specified in Appendix C
in EN60204.
To ensure safety, install an optional AC reactor, DC reactor, or external braking resistor as follows:
1) Install inside an IP4X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are exposed.
2) Install inside an IP2X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are not exposed.
In case of external cooling system, cover the drive rear side in order not to touch the main capacitor
and braking resistor.
General Instructions
For clarity, some figures in this manual may show the drive with covers and safety screens removed for
explanation purposes. Do not operate the device until all such covers and screens have been replaced.
vi
AF-300 G11 Model Numbering System Diagram

Description 6K G11 N
N (X/N)NN
GE Product Code
AF-300 Drive Family
Input Voltage
2 = 230V 50/60 Hz
4 = 460V 50/60 Hz
Input Phases
3 = 3 Phase
Horsepower
F50 = 1/2 Hp
010 = 10 Hp
100 = 100 Hp
Factory Installed Options
N = None
X = Keypad
B = to be determined
Enclosure Type
1 = NEMA 1 (UL Type 1)
8 = IP00 with NEMA 12 heatsink
9 = IP00
Product Revision
A = 1st Revision
B = 2nd Revision
Minor Product Revision
1 = 1st Minor Revision
2 = 2nd Minor Revision
vii
AF-300 G11 Dimensions & Weights

HP
Rating
NEMA
Enclosure
Rated Output Overload

Current (A) (150% 1min.)
AF-300G11
Model No.
Catalog
Dimensions
No. H x W x D (inches)
Weight
(lbs)
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 1

0.25
0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
3
5
8
11
17
25
33
46
59
74
87
115
145
180
215
283
346
2.3
4.5
7.5
12
17
26
38
50
69
89
111
131
173
218
270
323
425
519
6KG1123F25X1##
6KG1123F50X1##
6KG1123001X1##
6KG1123002X1##
6KG1123003X1##
6KG1123005X1##
6KG1123007X1##
6KG1123010X1##
6KG1123015X1##
6KG1123020X1##
6KG1123025X1##
6KG1123030X1##
6KG1123040X1##
6KG1123050X1##
6KG1123060X1##
6KG1123075X1##
6KG1123100X1##
6KG1123125X1##
D6501
D6502
D6503
D6504
D6505
D6506
D6507
D6508
D6509
D6510
D6511
D6512
D6513
D6514
D6515
D6516
D6517
D6518
10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12
10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
29.7 x 13.5 x 10.0
33.1 x 14.9 x 10.6
38.0 x 14.9 x 10.6
38.0 x 14.9 x 10.6
41.3 x 21.0 x 11.2
50.4 x 26.9 x 14.2
4.8
4.8
5.5
8.4
8.4
8.4
13.4
13.4
22.0
22.0
23.1
23.1
70
86
106
110
172
282
6KG1123F25X4##
6KG1123F50X4##
6KG1123001X4##
6KG1123002X4##
6KG1123003X4##
6KG1123005X4##
6KG1123007X4##
6KG1123010X4##
D6551
D6552
D6553
D6554
D6555
D6556
D6557
D6558
10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12
10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
4.8
4.8
5.5
8.4
8.4
8.4
13.4
13.4
6KG1123015X2##
6KG1123020X2##
6KG1123025X2##
6KG1123030X2##
D6559
D6560
D6561
D6562
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68

15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
22.0
22.0
23.1
23.1

0.25
0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1.5
3
5
8
11
17
25
33
2.3
4.5
7.5
12
17
26
38
50

15
20
25
30
12
12
12
12
46
59
74
87
69
89
111
131
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open

40
Open
115
173
6KG1123040X9##
--21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0
64
50
Open
145
218
6KG1123050X9##
--24.2 x 14.8 x 10.6
79
60
Open
180
270
6KG1123060X9##
--29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6
97
75
Open
215
323
6KG1123075X9##
--29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6
101
100
Open
283
425
6KG1123100X9##
--29.5 x 20.9 x 11.2
154
125
Open
346
519
6KG1123125X9##
--34.6 x 26.8 x 14.2
253
## Indicates product revision.
Note: Horsepower rating is shown for 230V and 460V nominal systems, 1800 RPM motors.
When applying at lower voltage and lower speed AC motors, select the drive by rated current and not Hp rating.
viii

HP
Rating
NEMA
Enclosure

AF-300G11
Model No.
Catalog
Dimensions
Weight
(lbs)
230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open with NEMA 12 Heatsink

40
50
60
75
100
125
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
115
145
180
215
283
346
173
218
270
323
425
519
6KG1123040X8##
6KG1123050X8##
6KG1123060X8##
6KG1123075X8##
6KG1123100X8##
6KG1123125X8##
-------------
21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0

24.2 x 14.8 x 10.6
29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6
29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6
29.5 x 20.9 x 11.2
34.6 x 26.8 x 14.2
64
79
97
101
154
253
6KG1143F50X1##
6KG1143001X1##
6KG1143002X1##
6KG1143003X1##
6KG1143005X1##
6KG1143007X1##
6KG1143010X1##
6KG1143015X1##
6KG1143020X1##
6KG1143025X1##
6KG1143030X1##
6KG1143040X1##
6KG1143050X1##
6KG1143060X1##
6KG1143075X1##
6KG1143100X1##
6KG1143125X1##
6KG1143150X1##
6KG1143200X1##
6KG1143250X1##
6KG1143300X1##
6KG1143350X1##
6KG1143400X1##
6KG1143450X1##
6KG1143500X1##
6KG1143600X1##
D6519
D6520
D6521
D6522
D6523
D6524
D6525
D6526
D6527
D6528
D6529
D6531
D6532
D6533
D6534
D6535
D6536
D6537
D6538
D6539
D6540
D6541
D6542
D6543
D6544
D6545
10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
29.7 x 13.5 x 10.0
29.7 x 14.9 x 10.6
34.6 x 14.9 x 10.6
34.6 x 14.9 x 10.6
38.0 x 14.9 x 10.6
38.0 x 21.0 x 12.4
38.0 x 21.0 x 12.4
53.1 x 21.0 x 14.2
53.1 x 21.0 x 14.2
55.1 x 26.9 x 14.2
55.1 x 26.9 x 14.2
57.1 x 26.8 x 17.7
57.1 x 26.8 x 17.7
57.1 x 34.6 x 17.7
57.1 x 34.6 x 17.1
4.8
5.5
8.4
8.4
8.4
14.3
14.3
22.0
22.0
23.1
23.1
70
82
95
97
115
174
245
245
245
337
337
562
562
804
804
6KG1143F50X4##
6KG1143001X4##
6KG1143002X4##
6KG1143003X4##
6KG1143005X4##
6KG1143007X4##
6KG1143010X4##
D6569
D6570
D6571
D6572
D6573
D6574
D6575
10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 5.91 x 5.71
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
10.24 x 8.66 x 7.68
4.8
5.5
8.4
8.4
8.4
14.3
14.3

0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
2.5
3.7
5.5
9
13
18
24
30
39
45
60
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
520
585
650
740
2.3
3.8
5.6
8.3
14
20
27
36
45
59
68
90
113
137
168
225
264
315
380
456
566
623
780
878
975
1110

0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1.5
2.5
3.7
5.5
9
13
18
2.3
3.8
5.6
8.3
14
20
27

15
12
24
36
6KG1143015X2## D6576 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
22.0
20
12
30
45
6KG1143020X2## D6577 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
22.0
25
12
39
59
6KG1143025X2## D6578 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
23.1
30
12
45
68
6KG1143030X2## D6579 15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68
23.1
ix

HP
Rating
NEMA
Enclosure

AF-300G11
Model No.
Catalog
Dimensions
Weight
(lbs)
460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open

40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
60
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
520
585
650
740
90
113
137
168
225
264
315
380
456
566
623
780
878
975
1110
6KG1143040X9##
6KG1143050X9##
6KG1143060X9##
6KG1143075X9##
6KG1143100X9##
6KG1143125X9##
6KG1143150X9##
6KG1143200X9##
6KG1143250X9##
6KG1143300X9##
6KG1143350X9##
6KG1143400X9##
6KG1143450X9##
6KG1143500X9##
6KG1143600X9##
-------------------------------
21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0

21.7 x 14.8 x 10.6
26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6
26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6
29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6
29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4
29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4
39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2
39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2
39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2
39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2
55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7
55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7
55.1 x 34.6 x 17.1
55.1 x 34.6 x 17.1
64
75
86
88
106
154
154
220
220
308
308
551
551
793
793
460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open with NEMA 12 Heatsink

40
Open
60
90
6KG1143040X8##
--21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0
64
50
Open
75
113
6KG1143050X8##
--21.7 x 14.8 x 10.6
75
60
Open
91
137
6KG1143060X8##
--26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6
86
75
Open
112
168
6KG1143075X8##
--26.6 x 14.8 x 10.6
88
100
Open
150
225
6KG1143100X8##
--29.1 x 14.8 x 10.6
106
125
Open
176
264
6KG1143125X8##
--29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4
154
150
Open
210
315
6KG1143150X8##
--29.1 x 20.9 x 12.4
154
200
Open
253
380
6KG1143200X8##
--39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2
220
250
Open
304
456
6KG1143250X8##
--39.4 x 20.9 x 14.2
220
300
Open
377
566
6KG1143300X8##
--39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2
308
350
Open
415
623
6KG1143350X8##
--39.4 x 26.8 x 14.2
308
400
Open
520
780
6KG1143400X8##
--55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7
551
450
Open
585
878
6KG1143450X8##
--55.1 x 26.8 x 17.7
551
500
Open
650
975
6KG1143500X8##
--55.1 x 34.6 x 17.1
793
600
Open
740
1110
6KG1143600X8##
--55.1 x 34.6 x 17.1
793
1. Before Using This Product

1.1 Receiving Instructions
Unpack and check the product as explained below.
If you have any questions about the product, contact GE
Drives or your local GE Drives distributor.
1.
Check the ratings nameplate to confirm that the

delivered product is the one that was ordered.
SER. No. : 9 9 1 0 - 0 0 0 1 2 M 0 0 01
Ratings Nameplate
Production lot serial number
Production week: Fiscal week (01 to 53)
Production year: Last two digits of year (99 = 1999)
2.
3.
4.
Check for damaged and/or missing parts upon delivery.

In addition to the drive unit and this manual, the package contains rubber bushings (for products with 30 Hp or less)
and a terminating resistor (1/2 W, 120 ohm). The terminating resistors for products with 30 Hp or less is packaged
separately. The terminating resistors for products with 40HP or more are installed internal to the drive unit. To
connect the internal terminating resistor, place hardware jumper J2 to the ON position. This terminating resistor is
required for RS485 RTU communication.
On drives rated 100 Hp and larger a separately mounted DC Link Reactor is provided. The reactor should be checked
for proper rating before installation.
1.2 Appearance
Mounting screws of
surface cover
(Total of 6 screws)
Mounting screws of surface cover
Lifting
Holes
(4 holes
total)
Keypad Panel
Intermediate cover
Surface
cover
Ratings nameplate
Keypad Panel
30 HP or less
40 HP or more Surface Cover
1-1
Ratings
Nameplate
1.3 Handling the Product

(1) Removing the Cover
For drives 30HP or less, loosen the cover mounting screws, then remove the cover by pulling from the top (see Figure
1.3.1).
Fig.1-3-1 Removing the Cover (for drives of 30HP or less)
For drives 40HP or more, first remove the six cover mounting screws, then remove the cover.
Mounting screws of service

cover (6 positions total)
Fig.1-3-2 Removing the Cover (for drives of 40HP or more)
(2) Removing the Keypad Panel

After removing the cover as explained in (1), loosen the keypad panel mounting screws and remove as shown in Figure
1.3.3 for drives 40HP or less.
Mounting screws of
Keypad panel
Fig.1-3-3 Removing the Keypad Panel (for drives of 30 HP or less)
For drives 40HP or more, loosen the keypad panel mounting screws and remove, using the finger holds on the keypad
panel case.
Keypad panel case
Fig.1-3-4 Removing the Keypad Panel (for drives 40HP or more)
1-2
1.4 Carrying
Carry the product by the main unit. Do not carry the product by its cover or parts other than the main unit. Use a crane or
hoist to carry a product equipped with hanging holes.
1.5 Storage
Temporary Storage
Temporary storage of this product must meet the conditions listed in Table 1-5-1.
Table 1-5-1 Storage Environment
Item
Ambient Temperature
Specifications
-10 to +50C
Condensation or freezing, as a result of sudden temperature
(+14 to +122F) changes, must not occur.
Storage Temperature
-25 to +65C1
(-4 to +149F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95%2
Atmosphere
The standard product must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive
gas, flammable gas, oil mist, vapor, water drops, or vibration. The salt content
in the atmosphere should be minimized.
Note 1: The storage temperature applies only to short periods of time, such as during transport. Refer to comments on
extended storage guidelines.
Note 2: Since a large change in temperature within this humidity range may result in condensation or freezing, do not
store where such temperature changes may occur.
1.
2.
3.
Do not place this product directly on the floor.

To store the product in an extreme environment, pack in vinyl sheeting, etc.
If the product is stored in a high-humidity environment, insert a drying agent (e.g., silica gel) and pack the product in
vinyl sheeting.
Long-term Storage
If the product is to be stored for an extended period of time after purchase, the method of storage depends primarily on
the storage location.
The general long-term storage method is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The above conditions for temporary storage must be satisfied.If the storage period exceeds three months, the upper
limit of ambient temperature must be reduced to 30C (86F) to prevent the deterioration of the electrolytic capacitors.
Pack the product thoroughly to eliminate exposure to moisture and include a drying agent to ensure a relative
humidity of about 70% or less.
Do not leave the product mounted in a control panel and exposed to the elements like moisture or dust (particularly
on a construction site). In this case, remove the product and store in a suitable environment.
Electrolytic capacitors will deteriorate if not provided with power for an extended period of time. Do not store
electrolytic capacitors for one year or longer without providing power.
1-3
1.6 AF-300 G11 Drive Ratings Efficiency and Watts Loss

HP
Rating
Rated Output
Current (A)
Rated Output
Power (KVA)
Efficiency at 2KHz
(%)
Efficiency at
15KHz (%)
Watts Loss at
2KHz (W)
Watts Loss at
15KHz (W)
Internal DB
(W)
0.25
0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
1.5
3
5
8
11
17
25
33
46
59
74
87
115
145
180
215
0.59
1.1
1.9
3.1
4.3
6.7
9.9
13
18
23
29
34
45
57
71
85
283
346
112
137
90.5
91.7
94.0
94.1
94.9
95.4
95.2
95.3
95.2
95.9
95.8
95.5
96.5
96.4
96.6
96.8
10KHz (%)
97.0
97.0
25
35
50
80
110
170
240
300
450
540
670
880
950
1200
1400
1600
2KHz (W)
2150
2600
30
45
60
110
140
210
310
415
620
720
890
1160
1200
1550
1750
2050
10KHz (W)
2500
3000
10
10
10
30
30
30
60
60
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
100
125
92.0
93.5
94.9
95.7
95.9
96.2
96.2
96.5
96.4
96.9
96.8
96.5
97.2
97.2
97.3
97.4
2KHz (%)
97.4
97.4
0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
1.5
2.5
3.7
5.5
9
13
18
24
30
39
45
60
75
91
112
1.1
1.9
2.9
4.3
7.1
10
14
19
23
31
35
47
59
72
89
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
520
585
650
740
119
140
167
202
242
300
330
414
466
518
590
89.3
91.7
94.1
94.5
95.0
95.3
95.4
95.9
96.5
96.4
96.4
96.4
96.1
96.4
96.5
10KHz (%)
97.2
97.2
97.3
97.3
97.3
97.4
97.4
97.4
97.4
97.4
97.4
35
45
60
80
130
170
230
300
360
460
550
750
950
1100
1300
2KHz (W)
1550
1950
2400
2650
3250
3900
4350
5450
6150
6700
7750
60
85
110
150
230
300
400
520
610
770
900
1250
1650
1850
2200
10KHz (W)
2350
2800
3350
3900
4700
5750
6300
7950
8950
9950
11300
10
10
30
30
30
60
60
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
93.5
95.4
96.7
97.0
97.1
97.3
97.3
97.6
97.9
97.8
97.8
97.8
97.7
97.8
97.9
2KHz (%)
98.1
98.0
98.0
98.2
98.1
98.2
98.2
98.2
98.2
98.3
98.2
230VAC
N/A
N/A
460VAC
1-4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2. Installation Environment and Connection

2.1 Operating Environment
CAUTION
Install this product in a location that meets the conditions listed in Table 2-1-1.
Ensure that the drive and heat sink surfaces are kept
free of foreign matter such as lint, paper dust, small
chips of wood or metal, and dust. Fire or accident
may result.
Table 2-1-1 Operating Environment

Item
Location
Ambient
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Atmosphere
Altitude
Vibration
Specifications
Indoors
-10 to +50C (+14 to +122F) - for products of
30 HP or less, the ventilating covers must be
removed if ambient temperature exceeds
+40C (104F), NEMA Type 4 & 12 Unit -10 to
+40C (+14 to +104F)
5 to 95% (No condensation).
Table 2-1-2 Output current reduction rate based on

altitude
Altitude
3300 feet
(1000m or lower)
3300-4950 feet
(1000-1500m)
4950-6600 feet
(1500-2000m)
6600-8250 feet
(2000-2500m)
8250-9900 feet
(2500-3000m)
The product must not be exposed to dust,

direct sunlight, corrosive gas, oil mist, vapor, or
water. There must be a minimum salt content in
the atmosphere. Do not store where
condensation may occur as a result of sudden
changes in temperature.
1000 m (3300 feet) or lower - For altitude above
1000 m (3300 feet), see Table 2-1-2.
3mm peak from 2 to 9Hz, 9.8m/s2 from 9 to 20Hz,
2m/s2 from 20-55Hz, 1m/s2 from 55 to 200Hzs.
Top
2.2 Installation Method

1.
2.
3.
Left
X
5.
6.
0.95
0.91
0.88
4 (100mm)
AF-300 G11 Drive
Bottom
Right
X
4 (100mm)
Internal
Heat
Dissipation
(30%)
Install this product on nonflammable material such as

metal.
When installing this product in a control panel,
consider ventilation to prevent the drives ambient
temperature from exceeding the specified value. Do
not install the product in an area from which heat
cannot be sufficiently released.
If two or more drives must be installed in the same
device or control panel, arrange the units horizontally
to minimize the effect of heat. If two or more drives
must be installed vertically, place an insulated plate
between the drives to minimize the effect of heat.
When shipped from the factory, drives provide
internal cooling inside the panel. A drive of 30HP or
less can be converted to external cooling simply by
adding an optional mounting adapter.
0.97
Fig. 2-2-1 30 HP or less: Gap X can be

0. (side-by-side installation) 40HP or
more: Gap X >= 2.0 (50mm)
Securely fasten the product in an upright position on

a solid structure with the tag AF-300G11 facing the
front. Do not turn the product upside down or install
in a horizontal position. Fig. 2-2-1
Since heat is generated during drive operation, the
spaces shown in Fig. 2-2-1 are required to ensure
sufficient cooling. Do not install the product beneath
a device sensitive to heat as heat radiates upward.
The heat sink may reach a temperature of 90C
(+194F) during drive operation. Ensure that the
material surrounding the product can withstand this
temperature.
WARNING
4.
Output current
reduction rate
1
Internal
fan
Internal
air supply
Fig. 2-2-2 Through Panel Mount
2-1
External
Heat
Dissipation
(70%)
Cooling fan
Heatsink
External
air supply
A drive of 40HP or more can be converted to external

cooling simply by moving the upper and lower mounting
brackets as shown in Fig. 2-2-3. Remove the M6 bracket
screws, move the brackets, then secure the brackets
using the M5 case mounting screws. (The bracket screws
are no longer required after changing the bracket mounting position.)
Installation of Open Type with NEMA 12 Heatsink Drive

(40 Hp and above)
Bracket Screws (M6)

Case mounting
screws (M5)
10 screws total
Fig. 2.2.6
Mounting
Fig.2.2.5
Mounting
bracket
1.
Fig. 2-2-3
In an external cooling system, a heat sink radiating about

70% of total drive heat (total loss) can be placed outside
the device or control panel, as shown in Fig. 2-2-2.
2.
3.
7. For drives of 30HP or less, remove the ventilating

covers if ambient temperature exceeds +40C (104F).
1. Removing the Ventilating Covers

One ventilating cover is mounted on top of the drive and
two or three are mounted at the bottom. Remove the
main cover and then remove ventilating covers by
popping out the cover inserts as shown in Fig. 2-2-4.
Remove adhesive protection strip from gasket and

then mount gasket to panel/enclosure, carefully
aligning cutout and mounting holes.
Install the drive unit and tighten the mounting bolt
and nut. (Tightening torque: 119 lbs-inch [M8], 425
lbs-inch [M12] ). Mounting hardware to be supplied
by customer. (refer to figure 2.2.5)
After proper torque has been applied to all mounting
hardware, seal the outside end of the hardware with
silicon glue. Silicon glue to be supplied by the
customer. (Refer to Fig. 2.2.6)
Fig. 2-2-4 Removing the ventilating cover
2-2
2.3 Connection
Remove the main cover before connecting the terminal blocks as follows.
2-3-1 Basic Connection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Always connect power to the L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T main circuit power terminals on the drive. Connecting power to
another terminal will damage the drive. Check that the power voltage is within the maximum allowable voltage
marked on the nameplate, etc.
Always wire the ground terminal to ground to prevent problems such as fire or electric shock and to minimize noise.
Use a reliable crimp terminal for connection between a power terminal and a power wire.
After terminating the wiring connection, confirm the following:
a. Confirm that the connection is correct.
b. Confirm that all necessary connections have been made.
c. Confirm that there is no short-circuit or ground fault between the terminals and wire.
Connection modification after power-on
The smoothing capacitor in the direct current portion of the main circuit cannot be discharged immediately after the
power is turned off. To insure safety, use a multimeter to check that the direct current (DC) voltage is lowered to the
safety range (25V DC or less) after the charge lamp goes off. Also, confirm that the voltage is zero before shortcircuiting. The residual voltage (electric charge) may cause sparks.
WARNING
Always connect a ground wire. Electric shock or fire may result. Ensure that a trained specialist
performs all wiring. Confirm that the power is turned off (open) before beginning any wiring operations.
Electrical shock may result.
2-3
2.3.1 Basic Connection Diagram (Sink Logic)
Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated
(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.
(*2) Use as required.
(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.
(*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.
(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5)
(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.
Connect them as shown in the figure above.
(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.
(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.
(*9) If usingV2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.
(*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer
2-4
Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Sink Logic)
See page 2-4 for notes
2-5
Basic Connection Diagram (Source Logic, Typically used in Europe)
Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated
(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.
(*2) Use as required.
(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.
(*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.
(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5)
(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.
Connect them as shown in the figure above.
(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.
(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.
(*9) If usingV2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.
(*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer
2-6
Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Source logic, Typically used in Europe)
See page 2-4 for notes
2-7
2.3.2 Connecting the Main Circuit and Ground Terminals

Table 2.3.1 Functions of main circuit terminals and ground termnals
Symbol
L1/R,L2/S,L3/T
U,V,W
R0,T0
Terminal Name
Main circuit power terminals
Inverter output terminals
Input terminals for auxiliary control power
Description
Connects a 3-phase power supply
Connects a 3-phase motor
Connects a backup AC power supply to the circuit
(not supported for drives of 1 Hp or less)control
P1,P(+)
P(+),DB
DC reactor terminals
Terminals for external braking resistor
P(+),N(-)
Terminals for DC link circuit
Ground terminal
Connects the optional power correcting DC reactor

Connects the optional external braking resistor (for
drives of 10 Hp or less)
Supplies DC link circuit voltage to the external
braking unit (option) or power regeneration unit
(option).
Connects the drive chassis (case) to ground.
(1) Main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T)

1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect these terminals to the power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker or ground-leakage circuit breaker for
circuit protection. Phase-sequence matching is unnecessary.
To insure safety, a magnetic contactor should be used to disconnect the drive from the power supply when the drive
protective function activates.
Use control circuit terminal FWD/REV or the RUN/STOP key on the keypad panel to start or stop the drive. The main
circuit power should be used to start or stop the drive only if absolutely necessary and then should not be used
more than once every hour.
If you need to connect these terminals to a single-phase power supply, please contact the factory.
(2) Drive output terminals (U, V, W)

1.
2.
3.
Connect these terminals to a 3-phase motor in the correct phase sequence. If the direction of motor rotation is
incorrect, exchange any two of the U, V, and W phases.
Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the drive output.
If the cable from the drive to the motor is very long, a high-frequency current may be generated by stray capacitance
between the cables and result in an overcurrent trip of the drive, an increase in leakage current, or a reduction in
current indication precision.
When a motor is driven by a PWM-type drive, the motor terminals may be subject to surge voltage generated by drive
element switching. If the motor cable (with 460V series motors, in particular) is particularly long, surge voltage will
deteriorate motor insulation. To prevent this, use the following guidelines:
Drives 7.5 HP and larger

Motor Insulation Level
460 VAC Input Voltage
1000V
66 ft (20 m)
1312 ft (400 m) *
1300V
328 ft (100 m)
1312 ft (400 m) *
1600V
1312 ft (400 m) *
1312 ft (400 m) *
Drives 5 HP and smaller

Motor Insulation Level
1000V
1300V
1600V
66 ft (20 m)
165 ft (50 m) *
165 ft (50 m) *
328 ft (100 m) *
328 ft (100 m) *
328 ft (100 m) *
* For this case the cable length is determined by secondary effects and not voltage spiking.
Note: When a motor protective thermal O/L relay is inserted between the drive and the motor, the thermal O/L relay may
malfunction (particularly in the 460V series), even when the cable length is 165 feet (50m) or less. To correct, insert a
filter or reduce the carrier frequency. (Use function code F26 Motor sound.)
2-8
(3) Input terminals for auxiliary control power

(R0 and T0)
The drive operates even if power is not provided to these
terminals. If a protective circuit operates, and the magnetic contactor on the drives power is opened (off), the
inverter control circuit power, the alarm output (30A, B,
and C), and the keypad panel display goes off. To prevent
this, the main circuit AC power must also be supplied as
auxiliary control power to the auxiliary control power input
terminals (R0 and T0).
1. To ensure effective noise reduction when using a
radio noise filter, the output power from the filter must go
to the auxiliary control power input terminals. If these
terminals are connected to the input side of the filter, the
noise reduction effect deteriorates.
Fig. 2-3-2 Connection the auxiliary control-power input terminals
not exceed 16.5 feet (5m).
(4) DC reactor terminals (P1 and P(+))
(6) Terminals for DC link circuit (P(+) and N(-))
1.
The G11 drive of 15 Hp or more, does not contain a drive

circuit for the braking resistor. To improve braking
performance, an external braking unit (option) and an
external braking resistor (option) must be installed.
Before connecting a power factor correcting DC

reactor (optional) to these terminals, remove the
factory-installed jumper.
2. If a DC reactor is not used, do not remove the jumper.
Note: For drives of 100 Hp or more, the DC reactor is
provided as a separate standard component and should
always be connected to the terminals. DC reactor is
provided as open type, enclosure to be provided by other.
CAUTION
A DC reactor does not come with drives rated less
then 100 Hp, however, use a DC reactor or AC
reactor under the following conditions otherwise the
drive may be damaged or malfunction.
1)
2.
3.
4.
Used when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500k VA and exceeds the rated
capacity of the drive tenfold.
Used when a thyrister converter is connected as a
common load on the same transformer.
Used to prevent a drive OV trip from occuring when
the power factor capacitor in the power line is
switched on and off.
Used when the voltage imbalance exceds 3%.
(Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V]

Imbalance rate
between phase [%] =
3-phase average voltage [V]
1.
Connect terminals P(+) and N(-) on the braking unit to

terminals P(+) and N(-) on the drive. The wiring length
(twisted pair cables, etc.) should not exceed 16.5 feet
(5m).
2. Connect terminals P(+) and DB on the braking
resistor to terminals P(+) and DB on the braking unit.
The wiring length (twisted pair cables, etc.) should
not exceed 33 feet (10m). If terminals P(+) and N(-) on
the drive are not used, leave the terminals open. If
P(+) is connected to N(-), or the braking resistor is
connected directly, the resistor will burn up.
3. Auxiliary contacts 1 and 2 of the braking unit have
polarity.
4. Refer to DB unit instruction book for paralleled
resistors.
Note: Braking units and resistors are rated on degree of
braking, duration and system frequency of braking cycle.
Verify units meet application requirements.
x 100%
(5) Terminals for external braking resistor (P(+) and

DB) (10 Hp or less)
Fig. 2-3-3
For the G11 of 10 Hp or less, a built-in braking resistor is

connected to terminals P(+) and DB. If this braking
resistor does not provide sufficient thermal capacity
(e.g., in highly repetitive operation or heavy inertia load
operation), an external braking resistor (option) must be
mounted to improve braking performance.
1.
2.
3.
Remove the built-in braking resistor from terminals

P(+) and DB. Insulate the resistor-removed terminals
with adhesive insulation tape, etc.
Connect terminals P(+) and DB on the external
braking resistor to terminals P(+) and DB on the drive.
The wiring length (twisted pair cables, etc.) should
Fig. 2-3-4 Connection (10 Hp or less
2-9
<Enlarged view of part A>
When shipped from the

factory, CN UX is connected to the U1 side.
+
U1
U2
RO-TO L1/R-L3T
Fig. 2-3-5 Connection 15 Hp or more, 100 Hp or more

parallel resistors, 200 Hp or more parallel braking units.
(7) Ground terminal

The grounding connector should be sized in accordance
with the NEC or Canadian Electrical Code. The connection should be made by a UL listed or CSA certified
closed-loop termianl connector sized for the wire gauge
involved. The connector is to be fixed using the crimp tool
specified by the connector manufacturer.
<3D view of part A>

Factory Shipment Status Connector CN UX: U1
(8) Auxiliary power switching connector (CN UX) (for

drives of 40 Hp or more)
When a drive of 40 Hp or more requires main circuit
power voltage as listed below, disconnect the auxiliary
power switching connector CN UX from U1 and connect
to U2. For the switching method, see Fig. 2-3-6.
Main Voltage Requiring Auxiliary Power Switching Connector
Frequency [Hz]
Power Voltage Range [VAC]
50
380 - 398
60
380 - 430
CAUTION
Check that the number of phases and rated

voltage match those of the AC power supply.
Do not connect the AC power supply to the
output terminals (U, V, W). Injury may result.
Do not directly connect a braking resistor to
the DC terminals (P[+] and N[-]). Fire may
result.
The switching connectors are mounted on the power PCB

above the control PCB as shown on the right.
Note: To remove a connector, unlock the connector (using
the locking mechanism) and pull. To install, firmly push the
connector until it click locks.
CN UX (red)
Fig. 2-3-7 Switching Power Connectors (only for 40 Hp or more)
CN UX
2-10
2.3.3 Connecting the Control Terminals

Table 2.3.3 lists the functions of the control circuit terminals. A control circuit terminal should be connected according
to its function setting.
Table 2-3-3
Classification
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name
Function
Analog input
13
Potentiometer power supply
Used for +10V DC power supply for frequency setting POT

(resistance of 1 to 5k Ohms)
12
Voltage input
1. Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage

supplied from an external circuit.
- 0 to +10V DC / 0 to 100%
- Reversible operation using positive and negative signals:
0 to +/- 10V DC / 0 to 100%
- Reverse operation: +10 to 0V DC / 0 to 100%
2. Input feedback signal for PID control is input.
3. The analog input value from the external circuit is used
for torque control
* Input resistance: 22 k Ohms
V2
Voltage input
supplied from an external circuit.
Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage

- 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100%
- Reverse operation: +10 to 0V DC/0 to 100%
* It can be used only one terminal V2 or C1 alternatively.
* Input resistance: 22 k Ohms
C1
Current input
1. Frequency is set according to the analog input current supplied

from an external circuit.
- 4 to 20mA DC / 0 to 100%
- Reverse operation: 20 to 4mA DC / 0 to 100%
2. The feedback signal for PID control is input.
3. PTC thermistor input
* Use only one terminal - V2 or C1 Exclusively

* Input resistance: 250 Ohms
* PTC switch is off when PTC function is not used
11
Analog input common
Common terminal for analog input signals
2-11
Digital input
FWD
Forward operation /
Stop command
Used for forward operation (when FWD-CM is on) or

deceleration and stop (when FWD-CM is opened)
REV
Reverse operation /
Stop command
Used for reverse operation (when REV-CM is on) or

deceleration and stop (when REV-CM is opened)
X1
Digital input 1
The coast-to-stop command, external alarm, alarm reset, multistep frequency selection, and other functions (from an external
circuit) can be assigned to terminals X1 to X9. For details, see
"Setting the Terminal Functions E01 to E09" in Section 5.2
Function Explanation.
<Specifications of digital input circuit>
Item
Operating voltage
Analog output
min.
0V
22V
typ.
24V
3.2mA
max.
2V
27V
4.5 mA
0.5 mA
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
Digital input 8
Digital input 9
P24
Control Unit power Supply
+24VDC power supply for control input. Maximum output current 100mA
PLC
PLC signal power
Used to connect power supply for PLC output signals; rated

voltage = 24 VDC (22 to 27) at sink logic operation.
CM
Digital input common
Common terminal for digital input signals and P24
FMA
Analog monitor
Outputs monitor signal using analog DC voltage 0 to +10V DC.

The signal indicates one of the following:
- Output frequency (before slip compensation)
- Load factor
- Output frequency (after slip compensation)
- Power consumption
- Output current
- PID feedback value
- Output voltage
- PG feedback value
- Output torque
- DC link circuit voltage
* Connectable impedance: min. 5k ohms
Frequency monitor
(pulse waveform output)
Outputs a monitor signal using the pulse waveform.

This signal has the same function as the FMA signal.
Maximum load current

Leakage current
(11: common
terminal)
Pulse output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
FMP
(CM: common
terminal)
2-12
Transistor
Y1
Transistor output 1
A running signal, frequency equivalence signal, overload early

warning output signal, and other signals from the drive are output
(as transistor output) to arbitrary ports. For details, see "Setting the
Terminal Functions E20 to E23" in Section 5.2 Function Explanation.
* <Specifications of transistor output circuit>
Item
Operating voltage
Y2
Y3
Y4
Transistor output 2
Transistor output 3
Transistor output 4
CMY
Transistor output common
Relay output 30A,30B,30C
Communication
Alarm outputs for any fault.
Maximum load current

Leakage current
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
min.
typ.
1V
24V
max.
2V
27V
50 mA
0.1 mA
Common terminal for transistor output signals. This terminal is

insulated from terminals (CM) and [11].
If the drive is stopped by an alarm (protective function), the alarm
signal is output from the relay contact output terminal (1SPDT).
Contact rating: 250 VAC, 0.3A,cos = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5A for CE
Marking
An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal
operation) can be selected.
Y5A,Y5C
Multi-purpose signal
These signals can be output similar to the Y1 to Y4 signals above.

The contact rating is the same as that of the alarm output above.
DX+,DX
RTU communication
Input / output signal terminals for RTU communication input / output

Up to 31 inverters can be connected using the daisy chain method.
SD
Communication cable
shield connection terminal
Terminal for connecting the cable shield. The terminal is electrically

floating.-
(1) Analog input terminals (13, 12, C1, and 11)

1. These terminals receive low level analog signals that
may be affected by external noise. The cables must
be as short as possible (20 meters or less), must be
shielded, and the shields must be grounded. If the
cables are affected by external induction noise, the
shielding effect may be improved by connecting the
shield to terminal [11].
2.
If contacts must be connected to these circuits, twin

(bifurcated) contacts for handling low level signals
must be used. A contact must not be connected to
terminal [11].
3.
If an external analog signal output device is connected to these terminals, it may malfunction as a
result of drive noise. To prevent malfunction, connect
a ferrite core or capacitor to the external analog
signal output device.
Drive
Shielded wires
13
12
11
VR
1k to
5K ohms
Fig. 2-3-9
Fig. 2-3-10 Example of Noise Prevention
2-13
(2) Digital input terminals (FWD, REV, X1 to X9, PLC,

and CM)
1. Digital input terminals (e.g., FWD, REV, X1 to X9) are
generally turned on or off by connecting or disconnecting the line to or from the CM terminal.
If digital input terminals are turned on or off by
switching the PLCs open collector output using an
external power supply, a resulting bypass circuit may
cause the drive to malfunction. To prevent a malfunction, connect the PLC terminal as shown in Fig. 2-311.
(6) Wiring of control circuit (inverter of 40 Hp or more)

1.
2.
3.
Pull out the control circuit wiring along the left panel
as shown in Fig. 2-3-12.
Secure the cable to cable binding hole A (on the left
wall of the main circuit terminal block) using a cabletie
(e.g., Insulock). The cable-tie must not exceed 0.14"
(3.5mm) in width and 0.06" (1.5mm) in thickness.
When the optional PC board is mounted, the signal
lines must be secured to cable binding hole B.
Fig. 2-3-11 Prevention of Bypass Current by External Power
2.
When using a contact input, a high-quality relay with

reliable contacts must be used.
(3) Transistor output terminals (Y1 to Y4, CMY)
1. These terminals have a circuit configuration as shown
in Table 2-3-3, "Transistor Output". Confirm the
polarity of the external power supply.
2. To connect a control relay, connect a surge absorbing
diode to both ends of its exciting coil.
(4) Sink or Source Logic Selection.
1. Set SWI for Sink or Source Connection to the PLC.
The factory default setting is Sink and this instruction
manual explains Sink logic function only.
2. When you need to connect source type logic, refer to
Basic Connection Diagram Fig. 2-3-3 and Fig. 2-3-4
and Technical Information Manual. (Sink Logic is
commonly used in the USA and Source Logic is
commonly used in Europe.)
(5) Others
1. To prevent a malfunction as a result of noise, control
terminal cables must be placed as far as possible
from the main circuit cables.
2. The control cables inside the inverter must be
secured to prevent direct contact with the main
circuit (e.g., main circuit terminal block).
Fig. 2-3-12 The Control Wiring Route
Cable ties
Cable binding
Hole B
wiring
Cable
binding
Hole A
Fig. 2-3-13 Securing Positions for Inverter Control Circuit Wiring (40 HP or more)
WARNING
Control lines generally do not have enhanced
insulation. If the insulation of a control line is
damaged, the control signals may be exposed to
high voltage in the main circuit. The Low Voltage
Directive in Europe also restricts the exposure to
high voltage. Electric shock may result
CAUTION
The inverter, motor, and cables generate noise.
Check that the ambient sensors and devices do
not malfunction. Accident may result.
2-14
2.3.4 Terminal Configuration

(1) Main circuit terminals
50 To 75 Hp 230 VAC
100 to 150 Hp 460 VAC
1/4 to 1 Hp 230 VAC

1/2 to 1 Hp 460 VAC
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB
G
G
P1 P(+) N()
R0
T0
N()
Screw size G = M8
Other terminals = M10
P1 P(+) N()
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-) U V
G G
R0
Screw size M3.5

U
Screw size G = M10

125 Hp 230 VAC

200 to 350 Hp 460 VAC
T0
P1 P(+) N()
Screw size M4
R0 T0
Screw size M3.5
7.5 to 10 Hp 230 VAC

7.5 to 10 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M4
R0 T0
V
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
P1
V
P(+)
W
N(-)
G G Screw size G = M10
Screw size M5

400, 450 Hp 460 VAC
15 to 30 Hp 230 VAC
15 to 30 Hp 460 VAC
R0
T0
R0 T0
Screw size M3.5

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB
100 Hp 230 VAC
Screw size M4
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB
V
P(+)
P1
G G
Screw size M3.5
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB
P1 P(+) N()
Screw size M4
V
W
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1
U
V
W
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1
U
G
G
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB
2 to 5 Hp 230 VAC
2 to 5 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M6
P(+)
P(+)
N(-)
N(-)
Screw size G = M10

500, 600 Hp 460 VAC
40 Hp 230 VAC
40 to 75 Hp 460 VAC
Screw size M4
R0 T0
U
R0 T0
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB
G G
P1
V
P(+)
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-) U V W

L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-) U V W
N()
Screw size M8
Screw size RO,TO = M4 G = M10

2-15
(2) Control circuit terminals

30A Y5A CMY
30C 30B Y5C
Y3
Y4
Y1
Y2
C1
11
FMA FMP PLC
12
13
V2
X1
CM
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
CM FWD REV P24 P24 DX- DX+
X9
SD
2.3.5 AF-300 G11 Drive Cable Size, Tightening Torque and Circuit Protection Rating
Incoming Device
Tightening Torque lb-Inch (Nm)
Cable size AWG
Input Fuse
HP
L1/R, L2/S, L1/R, L2/S,

L3/T
L3/T
(Nominal) (Maximum) (*1)
Auxiliary
Input
R0, T0
Input L1/R, L2/S,

Circuit L3/T, UVW,
Breaker P1, P(+), DB,
(*1)
N(-)
230VAC Input
0.25
3
0.5
5
1
10
2
15
3
20
5
35
7.5
60
10
70
15
100
20
125
25
150
30
175
40
200
50
225
60
300
75
350
100
300
125
400
3
6
15
20
30
50
80
125
150
200
225
250
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
15
15
20
30
40
60
100
125
175
225
250
300
200
225
300
350
300
400
460VAC Input
0.5
3
1
5
2
10
3
15
5
20
7.5
30
10
40
15
50
20
70
25
80
30
100
40
100
50
125
60
175
75
150
100
175
125
200
150
225
200
300
250
400
300
450
350
500
400
600
450
700
500
700
600
1000
3
6
10
15
25
45
60
90
110
125
125
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
20
35
50
70
90
110
150
175
100
125
175
150
175
200
225
300
400
450
500
600
700
700
1000
E(G)
10.6 (1.2)
20.8 (2.36)
R0, T0
Control
10.6 (1.2)
6.2 (0.7)
L1/R, L2/S,
L3/T
51.3 (5.8)
119(13.5)
239(27)
119(13.5)
4/0
Qty2 - 1
Qty2 - 2/0
Qty2 - 3/0
Qty 2 - 2/0
Qty2 - 4/0
239(27)
10.6 (1.2)
10.6 (1.2)
20.8 (2.36)
P1, P(+), N(-),

DB
14
10
8
6
4
3
2
1
1/0
3/0
4/0
Qty2 - 1/0
Qty2 - 3/0
Qty2 - 4/0
R0,
T0
14
16
31.0 (3.5)
425(48)
U, V, W
2/0
4/0
Qty2 - 1
Qty2 - 2/0
Qty2 - 4/0
Qty2 - 250
6.2 (0.7)
22
10
14
16
Control
22
14
12
10
31.0 (3.5)
51.3 (5.8)
119(13.5)
239(27)
119(13.5)
239(27)
425(48)
2
1
2/0
3/0
2/0
3/0
Qty2 - 1/0
Qty2 - 1/0
Qty2 - 3/0
Qty2 - 4/0
Qty2 - 250
Qty2 - 350
Qty2 - 500
Qty2 - 600
Qty2 - 700
8
6
4
3
2
2
1/0
3/0
4/0
Qty2 - 1/0
Qty2 - 2/0
Qty2 - 3/0
Qty2 - 250
Qty2 - 300
Qty2 - 400
Qty2 - 500
Qty2 - 600
Qty2 - 750
3
2
1
2/0
4/0
Qty2 - 1
Qty2 - 1/0
Qty2 - 3/0
Qty2 - 4/0
Qty2 - 300
Qty2 - 350
Qty2 - 500
Qty2 - 700
Qty2 - 800
Qty2 - 1000
10
(*1)Class J Fuse or Circuit Breaker reted 600V with the maximum current rating as shown in the above table shall be connected to the drive for 30HP and less.
Device ratings such as system coordination, short-circuit rating and type must be carefully reviewed by the user.
Wire size from NEC tables 310-16. Copper wire rated 60 Deg. C for 100amps or less, 75 Deg. C for over 100 amps in 30 Deg. C ambient and 1.25 times Drive rated amps.
These are minimum wire sizes : consult and confirm to local and national codes.
2-16
2.3.6 DC Link Reactor

Dimensions in inches
Height
Terminal
Depth
Width
Hp
230V G11
100
125
460V G11
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
Model No.
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
Loss [W]
DCR2-75B
DCR2-90B
7.87
7.09
10.63
11.02
7.09
8.46
37
37
55
57
DCR4-75B
DCR4-90B
DCR4-110B
DCR4-132B
DCR4-160B
DCR4-200B
DCR4-220B
DCR4-280B
DCR4-315B
DCR4-355B
DCR4-400B
7.48
7.48
7.48
7.87
8.27
8.27
8.66
8.66
9.84
9.84
9.84
10.63
11.02
11.02
11.02
12.6
12.99
13.78
14.57
12.01
12.99
13.78
6.89
7.87
7.87
8.07
8.07
9.06
9.06
9.65
8.78
8.78
9.17
35
44
46
55
68
75
81
95
88
99
106
58
64
73
84
90
126
131
133
150
205
215
Note:
AF-300 G11 Drives rated 100 Hp and above are furnished with a DC link reactor. This reactor must be installed
between terminal P1 and P+ prior to commissioning of the Drive.
The weight of the DC Link Reactor is not included with that of the Drive.
DC Link Reactor is provided as open type and is separately mounted. Enclosure to be provided by others.
2-17
Notes
2-18
3. Operation
Drive
3.1 Inspection and Preparation Before Operation

Check the following before operation:
1. Check that the connections are correct.
In particular, check that the power supply is not connected to any of
the U, V, or W output terminals and that the ground terminal is
securely grounded.
2. Check for short circuits and ground faults between the terminals
and sections under power.
3. Check for loose terminals, connectors, or screws.
4. Check that the motor is disconnected from the mechanical
equipment.
5. Turn off switches before turning on power to ensure that the drive
will not start or operate abnormally at power-on.
6. Check the following after power-on:
a. No alarm message is displayed on the keypad panel (see Figure
3-1-2).
b. The fan inside the drive is rotating. (For drives with 2Hp or
more.)
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, U,
V,
motor
power
Fig. 3-1-1 Drive connection
WARNING
Be sure to have the drive cover in place before turning on the power
(closed). Never remove the cover while power is applied to the drive.
To ensure safety, do not operate switches with wet hands. Electric
shock may result.
3.2 Operation Method
Fig. 3-1-2 Display on keypad panel at power-on
There are various methods of operation. Select a method of

operation according to the operating requirements and specifications; refer to Section 4-2 Operating the Keypad Panel, and
Chapter 5 Function Selection. Table 3-2-1 lists general methods
of operation.
3.3 Trial Run
Operation
Frequency Setting
Command
Operation
Operation
Command
Keys on keypad panel
using keypad
FWD
REV
STOP
panel
Once inspection is completed (see Section 3-1), proceed with a

trial run. The motor is initially disconnected and the drive is
operated (factory setting) using the keypad panel.
1.
Turn power on and confirm that the LED monitor display 0.00
Hz is blinking.
2.
Set the frequency to about 5 Hz using
3.
To start the run, press
FWD
REV
key (for reverse rotation). To stop, press STOP key. Verify

frequency increases for zero to the set point.
Connect motor and repeat steps 1-3
4. Check the following items:
a. Is the direction of rotation correct?
b. Is the rotation smooth (no buzzing or abnormal vibration)?
c. Are acceleration and deceleration smooth?
5. If no abnormality is detected, increase the frequency and
check the above items again. If the results of the trial run are
normal, start a formal run.
Input from
Terminals
terminal
FWD-CM and
signals
REV-CM
Frequency Setting POT(VR),
analog voltage, analog current
key.
key (for forward rotation) or
Operation
using external
3-1
Notes: If an error is detected in the drive or

motors operation, immediately stop and
attempt to determine the cause of error by
referring to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
Since voltage is still present at the main circuit
terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and auxiliary
control power terminals (R0, T0), even when
the output from the drive is terminated, do not
touch the terminals. The smoothing capacitor
in the drive is charged after the power is
turned off and it is not discharged immediately. Before touching an electric circuit,
confirm that the charge lamp is off or use a
multimeter to check that the volatge has
decreased below 25 VDC for low voltage at
the DC (P-N) terminals.
Notes
3-2
4. Keypad Panel
The keypad panel has various functions for specifying operations such as frequency setting, run/stop command, confirming and changing function data, confirming status, and copying function code settings.
Review the use of each function before attempting to operate the drive from the keypad panel.
The keypad panel can also be removed or inserted during inverter operation. However, if the keypad panel is removed
during keypad panel operation (e.g., run/stop, frequency setting), the drive stops and outputs an alarm.
4.1 Appearance of Keypad Panel

LED monitor
4-digit display. Used to display data such as setting frequency, output
frequency and alarm code.
Auxiliary Information Related to LED Monitor
Indicates selected units or multiple of the data shown on the LED monitor
and is displayed on the top line of the LCD monitor. The symbol
indicates selected units or multiple number. The symbol indicates that
there is an upper screen not currently displayed.
LCD Monitor:
Used to display various items of information such as operation status and
function data. An operating guide message, is scrolled and displayed at
the bottom of the LCD monitor. This LCD monitor has a backlight feature
which turns on when the control power is applied or any keypad key is
pressed, and stays on approximately 5 minutes after the last key stroke.
Status Indicators on LCD Monitor:
Displays current operating status:
FWD: Forward operation REV: Reverse operation
STOP: Stop
Control keys
(valid during keypad panel operation):
Used for drive run and stop
FWD
Forward operation command
REV
Reverse operation
STOP
Stop command
Operation keys:
Displays the selected operating mode:

REM: terminal block
LOC: keypad panel
COMM: communication terminal
JOG: jogging mode
The symbol
indicates that there is a lower screen not currently displayed.
RUN LED (valid during operation from keypad panel):

Indicates that an operation command was input by pressing the FWD or
REV key.
Used for switching screens, data

change,frequency setting, etc.
Operation Keys
Primary Function
Used to switch the current screen to the menu screen or switch to the initial screen in operation / trip mode.
PRG
FUNC
DATA
Used to switch the LED monitor or to determine the entered frequency, function code, or data
Used to change data, move the cursor up or down, or scroll the screen
SHIFT
Used to move the cursor horizontally at data change. When this key is pressed with the up or down key, the cursor moves to
the next function block.
RESET
Used to cancel current input data and switch the displayed screen. If an alarm occurs, this key is used to reset the trip status
(valid only when the initial alarm mode screen is displayed)
STOP
STOP
Used to switch normal operation mode to jogging operation mode or vice versa. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
RESET
Switches operation mode (from keypad panel operation mode to terminal block operation mode or reverse). When these keys
are operated, function F02 data is switched from 0 to 3 or from 1-4 to 0. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD indicator.
4-1
4.2 Operation From the Keypad Panel (LCD Screen, Level Structure)
4.2.1 Normal Operation
The keypad panel operating system (screen transition, level structure) is structured as follows:
60.00
Operation Mode
PRG
60.00
FUNC
DATA
60.00
FUNC
DATA
60.00
Supplementary
Screen
Program Menu
RESET
Screen for each

Function
RESET
FUNC RESET
DATA
PRG
4.2.2 Alarm Modes
If an alarm is activated, operation is changed from normal keypad panel operation to an alarm mode operation. The alarm
mode screen appears and alarm information is displayed.
The program menu, function screens, and supplementary screens remain unchanged as during normal operation, though
the switching method from program menu to alarm mode is limited to PRG.
60.00
Operation Mode
Keypad panel operating system during normal operation
Alarm is
activated
Alarm mode processing (including RESET )

Alarm
Alarm mode
PRG
Alarm
Program Menu
FUNC
DATA
Alarm
FUNC
D ATA
DAT
Screen for each
Function
RESET
Alarm
Supplementary
Screen
FUNC RESET
D ATA
PRG
4-2
Table 4.2.1 Overview of Contents Displayed for each Level

No.
Level name
Content
1 Operation Mode This screen is for normal operation. Frequency setting from the keypad panel and LED monitor switching are
possible only when this screen is displayed.
2
Program Menu
Each function of the keypad panel is displayed in menu form and can be selected. By selecting the desired
function from the list and pressing FUNC
the corresponding function screen is displayed. The following
DATA
functions are available as keypad panel functions (menus).
No.
1
Menu Name
DATA SET
DATA CHECK
3
4
OPR
I/O CHECK
Can check various data on the operating status.

Can check the status of analog and digital input/outputs for the inverter and
options as an I/O checker.
MAINTENANCE
Can check inverter status, life expectancy, communication error status, and
ROM version information as maintenance information.
LOAD FCTR
ALM INF
ALM CAUSE
Can measure maximum and average current and average breaking force in
load rate measurement.
Can check the operating status and input/output status at the latest alarm
occurrence.
Can check the latest alarm or simultaneously occurring alarms and alarm
history. Selecting the alarm and pressing FUNC
displays alarm contents for
DATA
troubleshooting.
9
3
4
Screen for each

Function
Supplementary
individual
Purpose
The code and name of the function are displayed. Selecting a function
displays a data setting screen for checking or modifying data.
The code and name of the function are displayed. Select a function to display
a screen for checking data. Modifying data is possible as described above by
going to the data setting screen.
DATA COPY
Places the function of one inverter in memory for copying to another drive.
The function screen selected on the program menu appears, hence completing the function.
Functions not completed (e.g., modifying function data, displaying alarm factors) onScreen
function screens are displayed on the supplementary screen.
4-3
4.3 Entering Data on the Keypad Panel

4.3.1 Operation Mode
The screen for normal inverter operation includes a screen for displaying drive operating status and a screen for graphically displaying the status in the form of a bar graph. The operator can switch between both screens by using the function
(E45).
1) Operating Status (E45=0)
60.00
60.00
RUN
STOP
FWD
Direction of rotation = blank (no command) or FWD/REV

Operating status = STOP (no command) or RUN
PRG
PRG
MENU
F/D
LED SHIFT
PRG
PRG
MENU
F/D
LED SHIFT
2) Bar Graph (E45=1)

60.00
Hz
Output frequency (maximum frequency at full-scale)

Output current (200% of inverter rating at full-scale)
Torque calculation (200% of motor rating at full-scale)
A
%
Fout/Iout/TRQ
4.3.2 Setting Digital Frequency

or
to display the set frequency on the LED. Data is increased or
On the operation mode screen, press
decreased in the smallest possible unit, depending on which key is pressed. The adjustments in data will occur rapidly if
the operator holds down
or
. To select a digit use SHIFT and then data can be set directly. To save the
frequency settings press
FUNC
DATA
Press RESET and PRG to to return to the operation mode. If keypad panel settings are not selected, the present frequency
setting mode appears on the LCD. When selecting the PID function, the PID command can be set with a process value
(refer to technical documentation for details).
1) Digital (keypad panel) settings (F01=0 or C30=0)
RUN
FWD
PRG
PRG
MENU
F/D
LED SHIFT
Frequency setting value
56.89
60.00
60.00
Screen explanation
Present frequency setting mode
Frequency setting range
<DIG>SET Hz>
LOCAL
<DIG>SET Hz>
LOCAL
50 - 400
50 - 400
F/D
F/D
DATA SET
STORING...
DATA SET
Operations guide
When
FUNC
DATA
pressed and writing
2) Non-digital setting
60.00
RUN
PRG
F/D
PRG MENU
LED SHIFT
60.00
Frequency setting value
<REMOTE REF>
12+V1
Screen explanation
Present frequency setting mode
F/D
Operations guide
DATA SET
4-4
4.3.3 Switching to LED Digital Monitor

to switch to LED monitor display. When monitored data is switched, the LED
During normal operation, press FUNC
DATA
monitor contents are displayed. When power is turned on, the monitor contents set by the function (E43) are displayed
on the LED.
E43
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
(E44 = 0)
Setting frequency
Setting frequency
Setting frequency
Output current
Output voltage
(specified value)
Synchronous
speed setting
value
Line speed
setting value
Load rotation
speed setting
value
Torque calculation
value
Power
consumption
PID setting value
PID remote
setting value
PID feedback value
When running
When stopping
(E44 = 1)
(E44 = 0.1)
Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)
Output frquency 2 (after slip compensation)
Setting frequency
Output current
Output voltage (specified value)
Unit
Remarks
Hz
A
V
Synchronous speed
r/min.
Line speed
m/min.
Load rotation speed
r/min.
Torque calculation value
Power consumption
kW
PID setting value

PID remote setting value
PID feedback value
For 4 digits or more, the lasr

digits are cut, with x10, x100
marked on the indicator.
indication
Displayed only when PID is

effective in PID operation
selection.
4.3.4 Program Menu Screen

The Program Menu screen is shown below. Only four items can be displayed simultaneously. Move the cursor
with
or
to select an item, then press FUNC
to display the next screen.
DATA
1. DATA SETTING
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
9. DATA COPY
DISPLAY
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
4.3.5 Setting Function Data

On the Program Menu screen, select 1. Data Setting. The Function Select screen appears with function codes and
names on it. Select the desired function.
60.00
RUN
PRG
F/D
PRG MENU
LED SHIFT
PRG
1. DATA SETTING
2. DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
FUNC
DATA
F00 DATA PRTC

F01 FREQ COM 1
F02 OPR METHOD
F03 MAX Hz-1
Function Code
60.00
60.00
60.00
4-5
Function Name
FUNC
DATA
F01 FREQ COM 1

0
0-11
Data Setting Range
Data
The function code consists of alphanumeric characters with unique letters assigned to each function group.
Table 4-3-1
Function Code
F00 - F42
E01 - E47
C01 - C33
P01 - P09
H03 - H39
A01 - A18
o01 - o29
Function
Fundamental functions
Terminal Extension Functions
Frequency Control Functions
Motor Parameters
High Performance Functions
Alternative Motor Parameters
Optional Functions
To scroll the Function Select screen rapidly, use

alphabetically.
F00 DATA PRTC
F01 FREQ CMD 1
F02 OPR METHOD
F03 MAX Hz-1
F00 DATA PRTC

F01 FREQ CMD 1
F02 PPR METHOD
F03 MAX Hz-1
Select the desired function and press
FUNC
DATA
Remarks
Can only be selected with an option connected
or
to move the screen as a unit sorted
F42 TRQ VECTOR 1

E01 X1 FUNC
E02 X2 FUNC
E03 X3 FUNC
A18 SLIP COMP 2

F00 DATA PRTC
F01 DATA PRTC
F02 OPR METHOD
to switch to the Data Setting screen.
On the Data Setting screen, the data values on the LCD can be increased or decreased in the smallest possible unit by
or
. Holding down
or
causes the values to increase or decrease more rapidly. Otherpressing
wise, select the digit to be modified using
and then set data directly. When data is modified, the value before
modification will be displayed at the same time for reference purpose. To save the data, press FUNC
DATA . Pressing cancels
the changes made and returns control to the Function Select screen. The modified data will be effective in inverter
operation after the data has been saved by FUNC
DATA . If the data is not saved, there is no change to the inverter operation.
When data setting is disabled in the case of Data protected or Data setting invalid during inverter running, make the
necessary changes as indicated in Table 4-3-2 below.
Table 4.3.2
Display
LINK ACTIVE
Reason for No Modification

Currently writing from RS-485 / RTU option to
function is being made
The edit enabling command function is selected
using a general-purpose input terminal
Release Method
Send a cancel command to function writing from RS485 RTU. Stops a write operation from the link
For functions E01 to E09, turn data terminal 19 (edit
enabling command selection) ON
DATA PRTCTD
INV RUNNING
Data protection is selected for function F00.

An attempt was made to change a function that
cannot be changed during inverter operation.
Change function F00 to 0

Stop inverter operation
FWD/REV ON
An attempt was made to change a function that Turn FWD/REV command off
cannot be changed with the FWD/REV command
on.
NO SIGNAL(WE)
4-6
4.3.6 Checking Function Data

Select 2. DATA CHECK on the Program Menu screen. The Function Select screen then appears with function codes and
names.
60.00
60.00
RUN
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
PRG
1.DATA SETTING
> 2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4.I/O CHECK
Function code
60.00
60.00
FUNC
DATA
F00
F01
F02
F03
0
*1
*1
60 Hz
Data changed from initial value
F00
DATA PRTC
FUNC
DATA
0
0-1
Data
Select the desired function and press FUNC/DATA to check the function data. By pressing FUNC/DATA, the screen
switches to the Data Setting screen, where data can be modified.
4.3.7 Monitoring Operating Status
Select 3. OPR MNTR on the Program Menu screen to display the current inverter operating status. Use
to switch between the four operation monitor screens.
RUN
60.00
60.00
60.00
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
PRG
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
> 3. OPR MNTR
4.I/O CHECK
Fout=xxxx.xHz
Iout=x.xxA
Vout=xxxV
TRQ=xxx%
FUNC
DATA
60.00
SYN=xxxxxx
LOD=xxxxxx
LIN=xxxxxx
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Torque calculation method
60.00
Fref=xxxx.x Hz
xxx xx xx xx
Synchronous rotation
speed (r/min)
Load speed (r/min)
Line speed (m/min)
60.00
SV=xxxxx
PV=xxxxx
TLD=xxx%
TLB=xxx%
and
PID setting value

PID feedback value
Driving torque limiting setting
Braking torque limiting setting
4-7
Setting frequency
Operation status
FWD/REV: Rotating direction
IL: Current limiting
VL: Voltage limiting
LU: Under voltage
TL: Torque limiting
4.3.8 I/O Check

Select 4. I/O on the Program Menu screen. Check to display analog and digital input/output signal status for the drive and
options. Use
and
to switch between the seven screens of data.
60.00
RUN
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU
F/D > LED SHIFT
60.00
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
60.00
PRG
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
> 4.I/O CHECK
FUNC
DATA
12=xx.xV
22=xx.xV
32=xx.xV
V2=xx.xV
60.00
AO=xxxxV
CS=xxxmA
DI=xxxxH
DO=xxH
60.00
P1=xxxx0p/s
Z1=xxxp/s
P2=xxxxxOp/s
Z2=xxxp/s
Signal OFF.
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
COM
FWD
REV
X1
Signal ON
Analog input signal
X2
X3
X4
X5
60.00
Terminal 12 input
Terminal 22 input voltage (AIO option)
Terminal 32 input voltage (AIO option)
DIO option I/O status
C1=xx.xmA
C2=xx.xmA
60.00
Analog output voltage (AIO option)

Analog output current (AIO option)
Digital input terminal (HEX indication)
Digital ouput terminal (HEX indication)
FMA=xx.xH
FMP=xx.xV
FMP=xxxxp/s
Signal OFF.
Signal ON
Input terminal status

(via communication)
60.00
Output terminal status
Y5
60.00
REM
FWD
REV
X1
Input terminal status (terminals)
X6
X7
X8
X9
Signal OFF.
Signal ON
Analog input signal

Terminal C1 input current
Terminal C2 input current (AIO option)
Output for meter

FMA output voltage
FMP output voltage
FMP output frequency
PG/SY option input status

Master-side A/B phase 4x frequency
Master-side Z phase 4x frequency
Slave-side A/B phase 4x frequency
Slave-side Z phase 4x frequency
4-8
4.3.9 Maintenance Information

Select 5. on the Program Menu screen. Maintenance to display information necessary for maintenance and inspection.
Use
and
to switch between the five screens of data.
60.00
RUN
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
60.00
60.00
PRG
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
FUNC
DATA
TIME=xxxxxH
EDC=xxxV
TMPI=xxxxC
TMPF=xxxxC
60.00
TFAN=XXXXXH
(25000H)
Maximum temperature of heatsink
60.00
Capacitor on PC Board
accumulation time
( ): Judgement level
Cooling fan operating
( ): Judgement level time
Imax=xx.xA
CAP=xxx.x%
60.00
NRK=xxxxx
NRR=xxxxx
NRO=xxxxx
(Maximum value in hour units)

(Maximum value in hour units)
> 5. MAINTENANCE
TCAP=XXXXXH
(61000H)
Cumulative powered on time

DC link circuit voltage
Maximum temperature of inside drive
Maximum current (rms)

(Maximim value in hour units)
Main capacitor capacity
60.00
No. of communication
errors: keypad panel
errors: RS-485
errors: option
INV=Hxxxxx
KEYPAD= Kxxxxx
OPTION=Pxxxxx
4-9
ROM version (drive)

(40HP or more: Hxxxxx
30HP or less Sxxxxx)
ROM version: keypad panel
ROM version: option
4.3.10 Load Rate Measurement

Select 6. Load Rate Measurement (LOAD FCTR) on the Program Menu screen. The maximum current, average current,
and average braking power during the set measuring time are measured and displayed.
60.00
RUN
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
60.00
PRG
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
FUNC
DATA
T=3600s
Imax=0.00A
Iave=0.00A
BPave=0.0%
5. MAINTENANCE
> 6. LOAD FCTR
60.00
T=150s
Imax=0.00A
Iave=0.00A
BPave=0.0%
Change measuring using
and
and
Start measuring
Displays the remaining
measuring tim, when
reaches zero, ends the
measurement.
Measuring time
FUNC
DATA
60.00
T=600s
Imax=0.00A
Iave=0.00A
BPave=0.0%
Set measuring time

(Measures maximum current, average
current and average braking power in
600s intervals.)
60.00
T=3600s
Imax=56.4A
Iave=23.5A
BPave=10.4%
Display returns to initial value

Maximum current
Average current
Average braking power
(Motor rated output/100%
4-10
4.3.11 Alarm Information

Select 7. Alarm Information (ALM INF) on the Program Menu screen. A variety of operating data at the time the latest
alarm occurred is displayed. Use UP and DOWN to switch between the nine screens of alarm information data.
60.00
RUN
OC1
60.00
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
PRG
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
Fout=xxxx.xHz
Iout=x.xxA
Vout=xxxV
TRQ=xxx%
FUNC
DATA
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
> 7. ALM INF
OC1
OC1
Fref=xxxx.xHz
xxx xx xx xx
TIME=xxxxxh
EDC=xxxV
TMPI=xxxxC
TMPF=xxxxC
Code of latest alarm

(High speed blinking during alarm
mode only)
Output frequency at alarm
Output current at alarm occurence
Output voltage at alarm occurence
Torque calculation value at alarm
occurence
Cumulative operating hours at alarm occurence

DC link circuit voltage at alarm occurence
Temperature inside drive at alarm occurence
Heat sink temperature at alarm occurence
Setting frequency at alarm occurence

Operating status at alarm occurence
FWD/REV: Rotating
IL:
Current limiting
VL:
Voltage limiting
LU:
Under voltage
TL:
Torque limiting
OC1
NRK=xxxxx
NRR=xxxxx
NRO=xxxxx
Input terminal status at a alarm
occurence (terminals)
OC1
REM
FWD
REV
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
SIGNAL OFF, SIGNAL ON
OC1
Output terminal status at a alarm
occurence
OC1
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
No. of communication errors at

alarm occurence: Keypad panel
alarm occurence: RS 485
alarm occurence: Options
COM
FWD
REV
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
Input terminal status at a alarm

occurence (communication)
X6
X7
X8
X9
Y5
OC1
OC1
5=xxx
4=xxx
3=xxx
2=xxx
Previous alarm
Before previous alarm
Two times before previous
0/1
-1
-2
-3
=xxx
=xxx
=xxx
=xxx
Multiple alarms
(Simultaneously
occuring alarms)
Alarm code
Up to four alarm codes can be dosplayed simultaneously.
4-11
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
Lastest alarm
No. of occurences
Alarm history
No. of occurences
Updated at alarm occurence. If the
cause of an alarm is the same as the
previous one, only the number og
occurences is incremented.
4.3.12 Alarm History and Factors

Select 8. Alarm Cause on the Program Menu screen, to display the alarm history.
Press FUNC/DATA to display troubleshooting information for the alarm selected.
60.00
RUN
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
60.00
60.00
PRG
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
FUNC
DATA
0.1=xxx xxx
-1=xxx xxx
-2=xxx xxx
-3=xxx xxx
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
> 8. ALM CAUSE
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
Alarm code of the

selected alarm
Alarm occurence factor
of the selected alarm
Alarm history
60.00
5=xxx
4=xxx
3=xxx
2=xxx
OC1
Lastest alarm
FUNC
DATA
0.1=xxx xxx
-1=xxx xxx
-2=xxx xxx
-3=xxx xxx
4-12
Multiple alarms
(simultaneously occuring alarms)
Move the cursor using
and
to select one of the
alarm occured
4.3.13 Data Copy

Select 9. Data Copy to display the Data Copy on the Program Menu screen. Read screen. A copy operation is then
performed in the following order: function data is read from the first inverter, the keypad panel is removed and attached to
a second inverter, the data from the first inverter is written to and stored in the second inverter.
The verify feature also makes it possible to compare and check differences in the data stored in the keypad panel and
the data stored in the inverter.
Read data
Write data
60.00
RUN
Attach keypad panel, Turn power ON.
FWD
PRG
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
60.00
RUN
PRG
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
PRG
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
> 9. DATA COPY
FUNC
DATA
<DATA COPY>
READ
Data copy screen
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
> 9. DATA COPY
Mode (read mode)
FUNC
DATA
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
FUNC
DATA
READ
Drive type of data

stored by keypad panel
<DATA COPY>
READ
Reading
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
WRITE
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
READ
COMPLETE
Data of drive type read

by keypad panel
Read complete
FUNC
DATA
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
WRITE
Remove keypad pananel
Mode (write mode)
Writing
4-13
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
WRITE
COMPLETE
Write complete
Data check (verify)
Error processing
60.00
1. Change disabled during operation
RUN
If a write operation is attempted during a drive

operation, or vice versa, the error message below
will appear. After stopping the drive and pressing
RESET retry the write operation.
FWD
PRG > PRG MENU

F/D > LED SHIFT
PRG
<DATA COPY>
30HP-2
60.00
1.DATA SETTING
2.DATA CHECK
3. OPR MNTR
4. I/O CHECK
WRITE
INV RUNNING
2. Memory error
5. MAINTENANCE
6. LOAD FCTR
7. ALM INF
8. ALM CAUSE
> 9. DATA COPY
If a write operation is attempted while data has not been

saved (i.e. no data) in the keypad panel data memory
during the read mode or when the drive type of data
read by keypad panel is different from the drive type to
which data is to be written, the following error message
will appear.
FUNC
DATA
<DATA COPY>
30HP-2
READ
<DATA COPY>
Drive type of data stored in
the keypad panel
WRITE
MEMORY ERROR
3. Verify error
<DATA COPY>
30HP-2
During a data check (verify) operation, if data stored

in the keypad panel differs from data stored in the
drive, the following error message is displayed to
indicate the function number. The data is suspended. To continue the data check and check for
other mismatching data, press FUNC
DATA . To stop the
data check and switch to another operation, press
RESET .
WRITE
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
VERIFY
Mode (data check)

<DATA COPY>
50HP-2
WRITE
ERR-F25
FUNC
DATA
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
VERIFY
Data check in
progress
<DATA COPY>
30 HP-2
VERIFY
COMPLETE
Data check complete
4-14
4.3.14 Alarm Mode

If an alarm occurs, the Alarm Screen indicating the alarm contents is displayed. Use
and
to
display alarm history and multiple alarms (if more than two alarms occur simultaneously).
Alarm detection on order
1.OC1
Alarm code
No. of consecutive occurences
Alarm name
1=xxx xxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PRG>PRG
MENU
RESET>RESET
Operation guide
Alarm detection order

LED
display
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Alarm code: See Table 6-1-1
Operation method
LCD
display
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
Description
No. 5 alarm
No. 4 alarm
No. 3 alarm
No. 2 alarm
No. 1 alarm (more than two alarms occurred)
Latest alarm (only one alarm occurred/alarm released)
Previous alarm history
Alarm history before previous alarm
Alarm history two times before previous alarm
4-15
Notes:
4-16
5. Function Selection
5.1 Function Select List
F:Fundamental Functions
Pg.
5-7
Func.
Name
No.
Setting Range
LCD Display
Min.
0, 1
F01
Frequency command 1
F01
FREQ CMD 1
0 to 11
F02
Operation method
F02
OPR METHOD
0 to 4
F03
Maximum frequency 1
F03
MAX Hz-1
50 to 400Hz
Hz
60
F04
Base frequency 1
F04
BASE Hz-1
25 to 400Hz
Hz
60
F05
Rated voltage 1
F05
RATED V-1
0V:
230: (230V class)
(Output voltage
proportional to source voltage)
Maximum voltage 1
F06
MAX V-1
(at Maximum frequency 1)

F07
Acceleration time 1
F07
ACC TIME1
F08
Deceleration time 1
F08
DEC TIME1
F09
Torque boost 1
F09
F10
Electronic
(Select)
F11
Thermal 1
(level)
(time constant)
F12
F13
Electronic thermal overload

relay (for braking resistor)
460: (460V class)
460V class:
320 to 480V
230V class:
80 to 240V
460V class:
320 to 480V
0.01
TRQ BOOST1
0.0, 0.1 to 20.0
0.1
F10
ELCTRN OL1
0, 1, 2
F11
OL LEVEL1
20 to 135% of drive rated current
0.01
Motor rated current
F12
TIME CNST1
0.5 to 75.0 min
min
0.1
19
F13
DBR OL
[ Up to 10 HP ]
6.0
20.0
12
2.0
5.0
12
10.0
F14
RESTART
0 to 5
(high)
F15
H LIMITER
0 to 400 Hz
(low)
F16
L LIMITER
Y
Y
3
1
0
-
Hz
momentary power failure
1
0
F15
Frequency
F16
Limiter
F17
Gain (for frequency set signal)
F17
FREQ GAIN
0.0 to 200.0%
F18
Bias frequency
F18
FREQ BIAS
-400.0 to +400.0 Hz
Hz
F20
DC brake
(starting frequency)
F20
DC BRK Hz
0.0 to 60.0 Hz
Hz
0.1
F21
(braking level)
F21
DC BRK LVL
0 to 100%
F22
(braking time)
F22
DC BRK t
0.0s (inactive)
F23
START Hz
0.1 to 60.0 Hz
Hz
0.1
0.5
F24
HOLDING t
0.0 to 10.0 s
0.1
0.0
F25
STOP Hz
0.1 to 6.0 Hz
Hz
0.1
0.2
F26
MTR SOUND
0.75 to 15 kHz (10kHz)
kHz
F27
SOUND TONE
0 to 3
(voltage adjust)
F30
FMA V-ADJ
0 to 200%
100
(function)
F31
FMA FUNC
0 to 10
(pulse rate)
F33
FMP PULSES
300 to 6000 p/s (full scale)
p/s
1440
F34
(voltage adjust)
F34
FMP V-ADJ
0%, 1 to 200%
F35
(function)
F35
FMP FUNC
0 to 10
F36
30RY MODE
0, 1
(driving)
F40
DRV TRQ 1
20 to 200%, 999
999
(braking)
F41
BRK TRQ 1
0%, 20 to 200%, 999
999
F42
TRQVECTOR1
0, 1
F23
Starting frequency
(holding time)
F24
F25
Stop frequency
F26
Motor sound
F27
F30
F33
FMA
FMP
F36
30RY operation mode
F40
Torque limiter1
F41
F42
(carrier freq.)
(sound tone)
F31
5-17
0.01 to 3600 s
0, 1, 2
Restart mode after
230: (230V class)

460: (460V class)
0
F14
80 to 240V
[ 15 HP and above ]
5-16
Change
during op
DATA PRTC
F06
5-15
Data
Formst
F00
5-10
5-14
40 HP
Data protection
230V class:
5-12
30 HP
F00
(at Base frequency 1)
5-11
Factory Setting
Unit
Torque vector control 1
5-1
70
0.1
100.0
0.1
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.0
Y
N
E:Terminal Extension Functions

Pg.
Factory Setting
Func.
Name
No.
5-18/21
5-22
Change
During op
40 HP
X2 terminal function
E01 X1 FUNC
E02 X2 FUNC
E03
E03 X3 FUNC
E04
E04 X4 FUNC
E05
E05 X5 FUNC
E06
E06 X6 FUNC
E07
E07 X7 FUNC
E08
E08 X8 FUNC
E09
E10
Acceleration time 2
E09 X9 FUNC
E10 ACC TIME2
E11
Deceleration time 2
E12
0 to 32
0.01 to 3600 s
6.00
20.00
12
E11 DEC TIME2
6.00
20.00
12
Acceleration time 3
E12 ACC TIME3
6.00
20.00
12
E13
Deceleration time 3
E13 DEC TIME3
6.00
20.00
12
E14
Acceleration time 4
E14 ACC TIME4
6.00
20.00
12
E15
Deceleration time 4
Torque limiter 2
E15 DEC TIME4

(driving) E16 DRV TRQ 2
6.00
20.00
12
Y
Y
0.01
20 to 200%, 999
999
999
N
N
E17 BRK TRQ 2
0%, 20 to 200%, 999
E20
Y1 terminal function
E20 Y1 FUNC
0 to 33
E21
E21 Y2 FUNC
E22
E22 Y3 FUNC
E23
E24
Y5A, Y5C terminal function
E23 Y4 FUNC
E24 Y5 FUNC
E25
Y5 RY operation mode
E25 Y5RY MODE
0,1
E30
FAR function
(Hysteresis)
E30 FAR HYSTR
0.0 to 10.0 Hz
Hz
E31
FDT function
0 to 400 Hz
E32
signal
E31 FDT1 LEVEL

(Hysteresis) E32 FDT1 HYSTR
E33
OL function
(braking)
(level)
(mode select)
E33 OL1 WARNING
10
0.1
2.5
Hz
60
0.0 to 30.0 Hz
Hz
0.1
1.0
0: Thermal calculation
0.01
motor rated current
19
1: Output current
E34
signal
(L
E34 OL1 LEVEL

(timer) E35 OL1 TIMER
(level)
5 to 200% of rated drive current
0.1 to 60.0 s
0.1
10.0
E36
FDT2 function
(level)
E36 FDT2 LEVEL
0 to 400 Hz
Hz
60
E37
OL2 function
(level)
E37 OL2 LEVEL
5 to 200% of rated drive current
0.01
motor rated current
19
E40
Display coefficient A
E40 COEF A
-999.00 to 999.00
0.01
0.01
12
E41
Display coefficient B
E41 COEF B
-999.00 to 999.00
0.01
0.00
12
E42
LED Display filter
E42 DISPLAY FL
0.0 to 5.0 s
0.1
0.5
E43
LED Monitor
E43 LED MNTR
0 to 12
0, 1
0, 1
E35
E45
(function)
E44 LED MNTR2

(function) E45 LCD MNTR
(display in STOP mode)
E44
5-27
Data
Format
30 HP
5-25
5-26
Min.
E02
E17
5-24
Unit
E01
E16
5-22/24
Setting Range
LCD Display
LCD Monitor
E46
(language)
E46 LANGUAGE
0 to 5
E47
(contrast)
E47 CONTRAST
0(soft) to 10(hard)
0 to 400 Hz
Hz
1
1
1
1
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
C:Frequency Control Functions

C01
Jump
(Jump freq. 1)
C01 JUMP Hz 1
C02
frequency
(Jump freq. 2)
C02 JUMP Hz 2
C03 JUMP Hz 3
(Hysteresis) C04 JUMP HYSTR
(Jump freq. 3)
C03
C04
5-28
0
0
0 to 30 Hz
Hz
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
Hz
0.01
0.00
C05
Multistep
(Freq. 1)
C05 MULTI Hz-1
C06
frequency
(Freq. 2)
C06 MULTI Hz-2
0.00
C07
setting
(Freq. 3)
C07 MULTI Hz-3
0.00
C08
(Freq. 4)
C08 MULTI Hz-4
0.00
C09
(Freq. 5)
C09 MULTI Hz-5
0.00
C10
(Freq. 6)
C10 MULTI Hz-6
0.00
C11
(Freq. 7)
0.00
C12
C11 MULTI Hz-7

(Freq. 8) C12 MULTI Hz-8
C13
(Freq. 9)
C13 MULTI Hz-9
0.00
C14
(Freq. 10)
C14 MULTI Hz-10
0.00
C15
(Freq. 11)
C15 MULTI Hz-11
0.00
C16
0.00
C17
C16 MULTI Hz-12

C18
(Freq. 14)
C18 MULTI Hz-14

0.00
C19
0.00
(Freq. 12)
0.00
0.00
5-2
Pg.
5-29
Factory Setting
Func.
Name
No.
C20
JOG frequency
C21
PATTERN
Setting Range
LCD Display
(mode select)
C20 JOG Hz
C21 PATTERN
Unit
Min.
30 HP
40 HP
Data
Change
Format
during op
Y
0.00 to 400.00 Hz
Hz
0.01
5.00
0,1,2
0.01
0.00 F1
13
0.00 F1
13
STAGE 3
0.00 F1
13
STAGE 4
0.00 F1
13
STAGE 5
0.00 F1
13
STAGE 6
0.00 F1
13
STAGE 7
0.00 F1
13
operation
5-29/30
5-30
STAGE 1
Operation time: 0.00 to 6000 s
STAGE 2
F1 to F4 and R1 to R4
FREQ CMD 2
0 to 11
(terminal [12]) C31

(terminal [C1]) C32
BIAS 12
-100.0 to +100.0%
0.1
0.0
GAIN 12
0.0 to +200.0%
0.1
100.0
C33 REF FILTER
0.00 to 5.00s
0.01
0.05
P01 M1 POLES
P02 M1-CAP
2 to 14
(Stage 1)
C23
(Stage 2)
C24
(Stage 3)
C25
(Stage 4)
C26
(Stage 5)
C27
(Stage 6)
C28
(Stage 7)
Frequency command 2
C31
Offset adjust
C32
5-31
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C30
C22
C30
C33
Analog setting signal filter
P:Motor Parameters
P01
Number of motor 1 poles
P02
Motor 1
(capacity)
5-32
Hp
0.01
motor capacity
40 HP and above: 0.01 to 600 HP

P03
P04
P05
P06
5-33
Up to 30 HP: 0.01 to 60 HP
P07
P08
P09
P03
P04
(on-line tuning) P05
(no-load current) P06
(%R1 setting) P07
(%X setting) P08
Slip compensation control
P09
(rated current)
(tuning)
M1-Ir
0.00 to 2000 A
0.01
motor rated current
19
M1 TUN1
0, 1, 2
21
M1 TUN2
0, 1
M1-Io
0.00 to 2000 A
0.01
standard rated value
19
M1-%R1
0.00 to 50.00%
0.01
M1-%X
0.00 to 50.00%
0.01
SLIP COMP1
0.00 to 15.00 Hz
Hz
0.01
0.00
DATA INIT
0, 1
AUTO-RESET
0, 1 to 10 times
RESET INT
2 to 20 s
FAN STOP
0, 1
ACC PTN
0,1,2,3
REV LOCK
0, 1
START MODE
0, 1, 2
--
ENERGY SAV
0, 1
DEC MODE
0, 1
INST CL
0, 1
RESTART t
0.1 to 10.0 s
0.1
Hz/s
0.01
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
H:High Performance Functions
5-34
5-35
5-36
H03
H04
(reset interval) H05
H05
H06
H06 Fan stop operation
(mode select)
H07
H07 ACC/DEC pattern
H08
H08 Rev. phase sequence lock
H09
H09 Start mode
H10
H10 Energy-saving operation
H11
H11 DEC mode
H12
H12 Instantaneous OC limiting
(restart time) H13
H13 Auto-restart
H03
Data initializing
H04
Auto-reset
(times)
(freq. fall rate)
H14 FALL RATE

(holding DC voltage) H15 HOLD V
H14
H15
0.00 to 100.00 Hz/s

3-phase, 230V class: 200 to 300V
3-phase, 460V class: 400 to 600V
H16
5-37
5-38
5-39/40
5-41
(OPR command self hold time)
H18
Torque control
H19
Active drive
H20
PID control
H21
(feedback signal)
H22
(P-gain)
H23
(I-gain)
H24
(D-gain)
H25
(feedback filter)
H26
PTC thermistor
H28
Droop operation
H30
Serial link
H31
Modbus-RTU
H32
5-43
H33
(mode select)
(level)
H27
5-42
(mode select)
(function select)
H16
H18
H19
H20
H21
H22
H23
H24
H25
H26
H27
H28
H30
H34
(baud rate)
H35
(data length)
H36
(parity check)
H37
(stop bits)
H38
(no response error detection time)
H39
(response interval)
10.00
200V class: 235V
0.0 to 30.0 s, 999
0.1
999
0, 1, 2
AUT RED
0, 1
PID MODE
0, 1, 2
--
FB SIGNAL
0, 1, 2, 3
P-GAIN
0.01 to 10.00 times
0.01
0.1
I-GAIN
0.0, 0.1 to 3600 s
0.1
0.0
D-GAIN
0.00 s , 0.01 to 10.0 s
0.01
0.00
FB FILTER
0.0 to 60.0 s
0.1
0.5
PTC MODE
0, 1
PTC LEVEL
0.00 to 5.00V
0.01
1.60
DROOP
9.9 to 0.0 Hz
Hz
0.1
0.0
LINK FUNC
0, 1, 2, 3
0 (broadcast), 1 to 247
0, 1, 2, 3
TIMER
0.0 to 60.0 s
2.0
BAUD RATE
0, 1, 2, 3
LENGTH
0 (8-bit fixed)
PARITY
0, 1, 2
STOP BITS
0 (2-bit), 1(1-bit)
NO RES t
0 (no detection), 1 to 60 s
INTERVAL
0.00 to 1.00 s
0.01
0.01
5-3
400V class: 470V
TRQ CTRL
H31 ADDRESS
(mode select on no response error) H32 MODE ON ER
H33
H34
H35
H36
H37
H38
H39
1
0.5
SELFHOLD t
(address)
(timer)
0.1
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
A. Alternative Motor Parameters

A: Alternative Motor Parameters
Pg.
Factory Setting
Func.
Name
A01
Maximum frequency 2
LCD Display
A01 MAX Hz-2
A02
Base frequency 2
A02 BASE Hz-2
A03
Rated voltage 2
A03 RATED V-2
No.
(at Base frequency 2 )

A04
5-44
Maximum voltage 2
A04 MAX V-2
A05
Torque boost 2
A06
Electronic
(select)
A07
thermal 2
(level)
(thermal time constant)
A08
A09
Torque vector control 2
A10
A11
Motor 2
(capacity)
Setting Range
Data
Change
Format
During op
Unit
Min.
50 to 400 Hz
Hz
60
25 to 400 Hz
Hz
60
230V class: 230
0
230V class:
80 to 240V
460V class:
320 to 480V
230V class:
80 to 240V
460V class:
320 to 480V
30 HP
40 HP
460V class: 460

V
230V class: 230
460V class: 460
A05 TRQ BOOST2
0.0, 0.1 to 20.0
2.0
A06 ELCTRN OL2
0, 1, 2
A07 OL LEVEL2
20% to 135% if INV rated current
0.01
motor rated current
19
A08 TIME CNST2
0.5 to 75.0 min
min
0.1
A09 TRQVECTOR2
A10 M2 POLES
0, 1
2 to 14 poles
pole
A11 M2-CAP
Up to 30 HP: 0.01 to 60 HP
HP
0.01
motor capacity
5.0
10.0
40 HP and above: 0.01 to 600 HP
5-45
A12
(rated current)
A12 M2-Ir
0.00 to 2000 A
0.01
motor rated current
19
A13
(tuning)
A13 M2 TUN1
0, 1, 2
21
A14
(on-line tuning)
A14 M2 TUN2
0, 1
A15
(no-load current)
A15 M2-Io
0.00 to 2000 A
0.01
19
A16
(%R1 setting)
A16 M2-%R1
0.00 to 50.00%
0.01
A17
(%X setting)
A17 M2-%X
0.00 to 50.00%
0.01
A18
(slip compensation control 2)
A18 SLIP COMP2
0.00 to 15.00 Hz
Hz
0.01
0.00
5-4
5.2 Alphabetical Function List

PG.
5-16
5-10
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-34
5-37
5-31
5-10
5-44
5-14
5-34
5-7
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-36
5-10
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-26
5-26
5-41
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-11
5-36
5-34
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-16
5-16
5-7
5-30
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-36
5-29
5-28
5-28
5-28
5-28
5-27
5-27
5-27
5-26
5-26
NAME
30RY operation mode
Acceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
ACC/DEC Pattern
Active drive
Analog setting signal filter
Base frequency 1
Base frequency 2
Bias frequency
Data initializing
Data protection
DC brake (Braking level)
DC brake (Braking time)
DC brake (Starting freq.)
DEC mode
Deceleration time 1
Deceleration time 2
Deceleration time 3
Deceleration time 4
Display coefficient A
Display coefficient B
Droop operation
Electronic Thermal 1 (Level)
Electronic Thermal 1 (Select)
Electronic Thermal 1 (Thermal
time constant)
Electronic thermal 2 (Level)
Electronic thermal 2 (Select)
Electronic thermal 2 (Thermal
time constant)
Electronic thermal overload
relay (for DB resistor)
Energy-saving operation
Fan stop operation
FAR function (Hysteresis)
FDT function (Level)
FDT signal (Hysteresis)
FDT2 function (Level)
FMA (Voltage adjust)
FMA (Function)
FMP (Function)
FMP (Pulse rate)
FMP (Voltage adjust)
Frequency command 1
Frequency command 2
Frequency limiter (High)
Frequency limiter (Low)
Gain (for freq set signal)
Instantaneous OC limiting
JOG frequency
Jump frequency (Hysteresis)
Jump frequency (Jump freq 1)
LCD Monitor (Contrast)
LCD Monitor (Function)
LCD Monitor (Language)
LED Display filter
LED Monitor (Function)
F36
F07
E10
E12
E14
H07
H19
C33
F04
A02
F18
H03
F00
F21
F22
F20
H11
F08
E11
E13
E15
E40
E41
H28
F11
F10
F12
LCD Display
30RY MODE
ACC TIME1
ACC TIME2
ACC TIME3
ACC TIME4
ACC PTN
AUT RED
REF FILTER
BASE Hz-1
BASE Hz-2
FREQ BIAS
DATA INIT
DATA PRTC
DC BRK LVL
DC BRK t
DC BRK Hz
DEC MODE
DEC TIME1
DEC TIME2
DEC TIME3
DEC TIME4
COEF A
COEF B
DROOP
OL LEVEL1
ELCTRN OL1
TIME CNST1
A07 OL LEVEL2
A06 ELCTRN OL2
A08 TIME CNST2
F13
DBR OL
H10
H06
E30
E31
E32
E36
F30
F31
F35
F33
F34
F01
C30
F15
F16
F17
H12
C20
C04
C01
C02
C03
E47
E45
E46
E42
E43
ENERGY SAV
FAN STOP
FAR HYSTR
FDT1 LEVEL
FDT1 HYSTR
FDT2 LEVEL
FMA V-ADJ
FMA FUNC
FMP FUNC
FMP PULSES
FMP V-ADJ
FREQ CMD 1
FREQ CMD 2
H LIMITER
L LIMITER
FREQ GAIN
INST CL
JOG Hz
JUMP HYSTR
JUMP Hz 1
JUMP Hz 2
JUMP Hz 3
CONTRAST
LCD MNTR
LANGUAGE
DISPLAY FL
LED MNTR
PG. NAME
5-26 LED Monitor (Display @ STOP
mode)
5-10 Maximum frequency 1
5-44 Maximum frequency 2
5-10 Maximum voltage 1
5-44 Maximum voltage 2
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Address)
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Baud rate)
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Data length)
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Mode select on
no response error)
5-43 Modbus-RTU (No response
error detection time)
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Parity check)
5-43 Modbus-RTU (Response
interval)
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Stop bits)
5-42 Modbus-RTU (Timer)
5-33 Motor 1 (%R1 setting)
5-33 Motor 1 (%X setting)
5-32 Motor 1 (Capacity)
5-33 Motor 1 (No-load current)
5-33 Motor 1 (On-line Tuning)
5-32 Motor 1 (Rated current)
5-32 Motor 1 (Tuning)
5-45 Motor 2 (%R1 setting)
5-45 Motor 2 (%X setting)
5-44 Motor 2 (Capacity)
5-45 Motor 2 (No-load current)
5-45 Motor 2 (On-line Tuning)
5-44 Motor 2 (Rated current)
5-45 Motor 2 (Slip compensation
control 2)
5-45 Motor 2 (Tuning)
5-15 Motor sound (Carrier freq.)
5-15 Motor sound (Sound tone)
5-28 Multistep frequency setting
(Freq. 1)
(Freq. 2)
(Freq. 3)
(Freq. 4)
(Freq. 5)
(Freq. 6)
(Freq. 7)
(Freq. 8)
(Freq. 9)
(Freq.10)
(Freq.11)
(Freq.12)
(Freq.13)
(Freq.14)
(Freq.15)
5-5
E44
F03
A01
F06
A04
H31
H34
H35
H32
LCD Display
LED MNTR2
MAX Hz-1
MAX Hz-2
MAX V-1
MAX V-2
ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
LENGTH
MODE ON ER
H38 NO RES t
H36 PARITY
H39 INTERVAL
H37
H33
P07
P08
P02
P06
P05
P03
P04
A16
A17
A11
A15
A14
A12
A18
STOP BITS
TIMER
M1-%R1
M1-%X
M1 -CAP
M1-lo
M1 TUN2
M1-lr
M1 TUN1
M2-%R1
M2-%X
M2-CAP
M2-Io
M2 TUN2
M2-Ir
SLIP COMP2
A13
F26
F27
C05
M2 TUN1
MTR SOUND
SOUND TONE
MULTI Hz-1
C06 MULTI Hz-2

C07 MULTI Hz-3
C08 MULTI Hz-4
C09 MULTI Hz-5
C10 MULTI Hz-6
C11 MULTI Hz-7
C12 MULTI Hz-8
C13 MULTI Hz-9
C14 MULTI Hz-10
C15 MULTI Hz-11
C16 MULTI Hz-12
C17 MULTI Hz-13
C18 MULTI Hz-14
C19 MULTI Hz-15
5.2 Alphabetical Function List (continued)

PG.
5-32
5-44
5-30
5-30
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-7
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-29
NAME
Offset adjust (terminal [12])
Offset adjust (terminal [C1])
OL function (Mode select)
OL function siganl (Timer)
OL function signal (Level)
OL2 function (Level)
Operation method
Pattern
(Stage 1)
Pattern
(Stage 2)
Pattern
(Stage 3)
Pattern
(Stage 4)
Pattern
(Stage 5)
Pattern
(Stage 6)
Pattern
(Stage 7)
PATTERN operation (Mode
select)
5-39 PID control (D-gain)
5-41 PID control (Feedback filter)
5-38 PID control (Feedback signal)
5-39 PID control (I-gain)
5-37 PID control (Mode select)
5-39 PID control (P-gain)
5-41 PTC thermistor (Level)
5-41 PTC thermistor (Mode select)
5-10 Rated voltage 1
5-44 Rated voltage 2 (at Base
frequency 2)
5-12 Restart mode after momentary
power failure
5-35 Rev. phase sequence lock
5-42 Serial link (Function select)
5-33 Slip compensation control
5-35 Start mode
5-15 Starting frequency (Freq.)
5-15 Starting frequency (Holding
time)
5-15 Stop frequency
5-11 Torque boost 1
5-44 Torque boost 2
5-37 Torque control
5-16 Torque limiter 1 (braking)
5-16 Torque limiter 1 (Driving)
5-22 Torque limiter 2 (braking)
5-22 Torque limiter 2 (Driving)
5-177 Torque vector control 1
5-44 Torque vector control 2
5-18 X1 terminal function
5-22 Y1 terminal function
5-24 Y5 RY operation mode
5-22 Y5A, Y5C terminal func.
P01
A10
C31
C32
E33
E35
E34
E37
F02
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C21
LCD Display
M1 POLES
M2 POLES
BIAS 12
GAIN 12
OL1 WARNING
OL1 TIMER
OL1 LEVEL
OL2 LEVEL
OPR METHOD
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
STAGE 3
STAGE 4
STAGE 5
STAGE 6
STAGE 7
PATTERN
H24
H25
H21
H23
H20
H22
H27
H26
F05
A03
D-GAIN
FB FILTER
FB SIGNAL
I-GAIN
PID MODE
P-GAIN
PTC LEVEL
PTC MODE
RATED V-1
RATED V-2
F14
RESTART
H08
H30
P09
H09
F23
F24
REV LOCK
LINK FUNC
SLIP COMP1
START MODE
START Hz
HOLDING t
F25
F09
A05
H18
F41
F40
E17
E16
F42
A09
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E07
E20
E21
E22
E23
E25
E24
STOP Hz
TRQ BOOST1
TRQ BOOST2
TRQ CTRL
BRK TRQ 1
DRV TRQ 1
BRK TRQ 2
DRV TRQ 2
TRQVECTOR1
TRQVECTOR2
X1 FUNC
X2 FUNC
X3 FUNC
X4 FUNC
X5 FUNC
X6 FUNC
X7 FUNC
Y1 FUNC
Y2 FUNC
Y3 FUNC
Y4 FUNC
Y5RY MODE
Y5 FUNC
5-6
5.3 Function Explanation

F: Fundamental function
F00 Data protection
F 0 0 D A T A
Set value
P R T C
0 : data can be changed

1 : data cannot be changed
This function protects the system by blocking any data

changes from the keypad panel.
Setting procedure:
0 to 1:
Press the STOP and

keys simultaneously to
change the value from 0 to 1, then press
the
1 to 0:
FUNC
DATA
to validate the change.
Press the STOP and

keys simultaneously
to change the value from 1 to 0, then press
the
FUNC
DATA
key to validate the change.
F01 Frequency setting 1

F 0 1 F R E Q
CMD 1
This function determines the method to be used for setting

frequency.
NOTE: Use only one terminal - V2 or C1, exclusively.
0:
Keypad operation (
1:
Voltage input (terminal 12 and V2) (0 to +10 VDC,

0 to +5VDC)
Current input (terminal C1) (4 to 20 mA DC)
Voltage and current input (terminals 12 and C1)
Reversible operation with polarity (terminal 12)
(0 to 10 VDC)
Reversible operation with polarity (terminal 12 and V1
option) (0 to 10 VDC)
2:
3:
4:
or
key)
Related functions E01 to E09 (Set values 21

6:
7:
8:
9:
Inverse mode operation (terminal 12 and V2)

(+10 to 0 VDC)
Inverse mode operation ( terminal C1)(20 to 4 mA DC)
UP/DOWN control 1 (initial freq. = 0 Hz
UP/DOWN control 2 (initial freq. = last value)
F02 Operation method

F 0 2 O P R
M E T H O D
This function determines the input method for operation

commands.
0:
Keypad operation (
FWD
or
1:
Terminal operation (
STOP
key active)
2:
3:
software
STOP
key active) with GE start
4:
software
STOP
key inactive) with GE start
STOP
REV
or
STOP
key)
key inactive)
This function can only be changed when terminals

Related functions E01 to E09 (Set values 17, 18)
10. PATTERN operation
Related functions: C21 to C28
and
are open.
REMOTE/LOCAL switching from the keypad panel

automatically changes the set value from 0 to 3 of this
function.
11: DI option or Pulse train input

For details, see instruction manual on options.
REV
FWD
5-7
GE Start Software Selection During Terminal Operation

Active: Setting 3 or 4
Inactive: Setting 1 or 2
POWER ON POWER
RESET
NETWORK
MODE
POWER
FWD
FWD
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ALARM
ALARM
RESET
RESET
FWD
FWD
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ALARM
ALARM
NETWORK
NETWORK
(LE-CM)
(LE-CM)
FWD
FWD
(TERMINAL)
ER6
Multi Alarms*
(TERMINAL)
FWD
FWD
(NETWORK)
(NETWORK)
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ALARM
ALARM
ER6
ER6
RESET
* See Alarm Mode, page 4-15.

Note: Start Software does not work in AUTO RESET mode or PROGRAMMING mode
Stop Key Mode Selection During Terminal Operation

Active: Setting 1 or 3
Inactive: Setting 2 or 4
STOP KEY FWD
TERMINAL
MODE
STOP KEY
NETWORK
MODE
FWD
STOP
STOP
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ALARM
ALARM
ER6
NETWORK
NETWORK
(LE-CM)
(LE-CM)
FWD
FWD
(TERMINAL)
(TERMINAL)
STOP
STOP
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ALARM
ALARM
5-8
ER6
Frequency Setting Block Diagram
5-9
F03 Maximum output frequency 1

F 0 3 M A X
FO7 Acceleration time 1

F08 Deceleration time 1
H z 1
Setting range 50 to 400 Hz
F 0 7 A CC
F 0 8 D E C
This function sets the maximum output frequency for

Motor 1.
Setting range
Setting a value higher than the rated value of the device

to be driven may damage the motor or machine. Match
the device rating when setting this function.
ACC TIME1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds

DEC TIME1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds
These functions set the acceleration time for the output

frequency from startup to maximum frequency, as well as
the deceleration time from maximum frequency to
operation stop.
F04 Base frequency 1

F 0 4 B A S E
T I M E 1
T I M E 1
H z 1
Acceleration and deceleration times are represented by

the three most significant (high-order) digits.
Setting range 25 to 400 Hz

This function sets the maximum output frequency in the
constant torque range of Motor 1 or the output frequency
at the rated output voltage. Match the motor rating.
Note: If the value of Base frequency 1 is set higher than
that of Maximum output frequency 1, the output voltage
does not increase to the rated voltage. The maximum
frequency limits the output frequency.
Set acceleration and deceleration times with respect to

maximum frequency. The relationship between the set
frequency value and acceleration/deceleration times is
as follows:
Set frequency = maximum frequency
The actual operation time matches the set value.
F05 Rated voltage 1

F 0 5 R A T ED
Setting range
Set frequency < maximum frequency
V 1
The actual operation time differs from the set value.
230 VAC series: 0, 80 to 240V

460 VAC series: 0, 320 to 480V
This function sets the rated value of the voltage output to

Motor 1. Note that a voltage greater than the supply
(input) voltage cannot be output.
Value 0 terminates operation of the voltage regulator
function, thereby resulting in the output of a voltage
proportional to the supply voltage.
Acceleration *deceleration operation time = set value x

(set frequency/maximum frequency)
STOP
FWD
Note: If the value of Rated voltage 1 is set higher than

Maximum output voltage 1, the output voltage does not
increase to the rated voltage. The maximum output
voltage limits the output voltage.
FO6 Maximum output voltage 1

F 0 6 M A X
Setting range
Note: If the set acceleration and deceleration times are

set too low, even though the resistance torque and
moment of inertia of the load are great, the torque
limiting function or stall prevention function are activated,
which prolongs the operation time beyond that stated
above.
V 1
230 VAC series: 80 to 240 VAC

460 VAC series: 320 to 480 VAC
This function sets the maximum value of the voltage

output for Motor 1. Note that a voltage higher than the
supply (input) voltage cannot be output.
5-10
F09 Torque Boost 1

F 0 9 T RQ
F 1 0 E L C T R N
BOO S T 1
Set value
This is a Motor 1 function. The following can be selected:

Selection of load characteristics such as automatic
torque boost, square law reduction torque load, proportional torque load, constant torque load.
Enhancement of torque (V/f characteristics), which is
lowered during low-speed operation. Insufficient magnetic flux of the motor due to a voltage drop in the lowfrequency range can be compensated.
O L 1
0: Inactive
1: Active (for general-purpose motor)
2: Active (for forced air motor)
This function specifies whether to operate the electronic

thermal O/L relay and selects the target motor. When a
general-purpose motor is selected, the operation level is
lowered in the low speed range according to the cooling
characteristics of the motor.
F 1 1 O L
L E V E L 1
The setting range is 20 to 135% of the rated drive current.

Setting Range
0.0
Characteristics Selected
Automatic torque boost, where the torque
boost value of a constant torque load (a
linear change) is automatically adjusted.
0.1 to 0.9
Square law reduction torque for fan and

pump loads
1.0 to 1.9
Proportional torque for middle class loads

between square law reduction torque and
constant torque (linear change)
2.0 to 20.0
Constant torque (linear change)
Torque characteristics
< Square law reduction torque >
This function sets the operation level current for the

electronic thermal O/L relay. Enter a value from 1 to 1.1
times the rated motor current value.
< Proportional torque >
F 1 2 T I M E
C N S T 1
The setting range is 0.5 to 75.0 minutes (in 0.1 minute

increments).
The time from when 150% of the operation level current
flows continuously to when the electronic thermal O/L
relay activates can be set with this function.
< Constant torque >
Since a large torque boost value creates over-excitation

in the low-speed range, continued operation may cause
the motor to overheat. Check the characteristics of the
driven motor.
F13 Electric thermal O/L relay (for braking)

F 1 3 D BR
F10 Electric thermal O/L relay (operation selection)

F11 Electric thermal O/L relay (level)
F12 Electric thermal O/L relay (thermal time)
The electronic thermal O/L relay manages the output
frequency, output current, and operation time of the
inverter to prevent the motor from overheating when
150% of the set current value flows for the time set by
F12 (thermal time constant).
O L
This function controls the frequent use and continuous

operating time of the braking resistor to prevent the
resistor from overheating.
Drive Capacity
15 Hp or less
20 Hp or more
5-11
Operation
0: Inactive
1: Inactive
2: Active (external braking resistor)
0: Inactive
F14 Restart after momentary power failure (operation selection)

F 1 4 R E S T A R T
The function for detecting power failure and activating

protective operation (i.e., alarm output, alarm display, drive
output cutoff) for undervoltage can be selected. The
automatic restart function (for automatically restarting a
coasting motor without stopping) when the supply voltage
is recovered can also be selected.
Setting range: 0 to 5
The following table lists the function details.
This function selects operation if a momentary power
failure occurs.
Set Value
0
Function Name
Inactive (intermediate
drive trip)
Operation at Power Failure

If undervoltage is detected, the drive will
immediately trip and an undervoltage fault (LU) is
displayed. The drive output stops and the motor will
coast to a stop.
Operation at Power Recovery

The drive operation is not automatically
restarted. Input a reset command and
operation command to restart.
Inactive (drive trip at

recovery)
If undervoltage is detected, the drive output stops

and the motor will immediately coast to a stop. A
drive fault is not activated.
An undervoltage fault (LU) is activated at

power recovery. Drive operation is not
automatically restarted. Input a reset
command to restart operation.
Inactive (drive trip

after deceleration to a
stop at power failure)
The drive operation is not automatically

When the DC bus voltage reaches the operation
restarted. Input a reset command and
voltage level (H15), a controlled deceleration to a
operation command to restart operation.
stop occurs. The drive collects the inertial energy
of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage and
controls the motor until it stops, then an
undervoltage fault (LU) is activated. The drive will
automatically decrease the deceleration time if
necessary. If the amount of inertial energy from the
load is small, and the undervoltage level is
achieved before the motor stops, the undervoltage
fault is immediately activated and the motor will
coast to a stop.
Active (operation ride- When the DC bus voltage reaches the operation
through; for high-inertia voltage level (H15), energy is collected from the
inertia of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage
loads)
and extend the ride-through time. The drive will
automatically adjust the deceleration rate to
maintain DC bus voltage level. If undervoltage is
detected, the protective function is not activated,
but drive output stops and the motor coast to a
stop.
Active (restart with the

frequency at the time
of power failure)
If undervoltage is detected, the protective function

is not activated. The drive output stops and the
motor will coast to a stop.
Operation is automatically restarted with

the frequency selected at the time of
power failure.
If undervoltage is detected, the protective function

Active (restart with
start frequency; for low- is not activated, but drive output stops.
inertia loads)
Operation is automatically restarted with

the frequency set by F23, Starting
frequency.
Function codes H13 to H16 are provided to control a

restart operation after momentary power failure. These
functions should be understood and used. The pick-up
(speed search) function can also be selected as a method
of restarting when power is recovered after a momentary
failure. (For setting details, see function code H09.) The
pick-up function searches for the speed of the coasting
motor to restart the motor without subjecting it to excessive shock.
5-12
Operation is automatically restarted. For

power recovery during ride-through, the
drive will accelerate directly to the
original frequency. If undervoltage is
detected, operation automatically
restarts with the frequency selected at
the time that the undervoltage was
detected.
In a high-inertia system, the reduction in motor speed is

minimal even when the motor is coasting. A speed search
time is required when the pick-up function is active. In
such a case, the original frequency may be recovered
sooner when the function is inactive and the operation is
restarted with the frequency prior to the momentary power
failure.
The pick-up function works in the range of 5 to 120 Hz. If
the detected speed is outside this range, restart the motor
using the regular restart function.
5-13
F15 Frequency limiter (High)

F16 Frequency limiter (Low)
F18 Bias frequency
F 1 5 H
F 1 6 L
This function adds a bias frequency to the set frequency

value from analog input.
F 1 8 F R E Q
L I M I T E R
L I M I T E R
Set values: 0 to 400 Hz
B I A S
The operation follows the figure below. If the bias

frequency is higher than the +Maximum frequency or
lower than the -Maximum frequency, it is limited to the
+Maximum or -Maximum frequency.
These functions are used to define the upper and lower

limits of the set frequency.
F20 DC injection Brake (starting)

F21 DC injection brake (operation level)
F22 DC injection brake (time)
The drive output starts with the start frequency when

operation begins, and stops with the stop frequency
when operation ends.
F 2 0 D C
BR K
H z
If the upper limit value is less than the lower limit value,
the upper limit value overrides the lower limit value.
Set values: 0 to 60 Hz
F17 Gain
Starting frequency: This function sets the frequency with

which to start a DC injection brake in order to decelerate
the motor to a stop.
F 1 7 F R E Q
G A I N
F 2 1 D C
This function assigns the rate of the set frequency value

to analog input.
BR K
L V L
Set values: 0 to 100%
Operation follows the figure below.
Operation level: This function sets the output current

level, when a DC injection brake is applied, as a percentage of the rated output current in 1% increments.
F 2 2 D C
BR K
Set value
0.0: Inactive
0.1 to 30.0 seconds
Time: This function sets the time for a DC injection

brake operation.
CAUTION
Do not use the drive brake function for
mechanical holding. Injury may result.
5-14
F23 Starting frequency (frequency)

F24 Start frequency (Holding time)
F25 Stop frequency
F 2 3 S T A R T
1.
H z
Reducing the set value adversely affects the output

current waveform (i.e., higher harmonics), increases
motor loss, and raises motor temperature. For
example, at 0.75 kHz, reduce the motor torque by
about 15%.
Increasing the set value increases drive loss and
raises drive temperature.
Setting range: 0.1 to 60 Hz
The starting frequency can be set to reserve the torque

at startup and can be sustained until the magnetic flux of
the motor is established.
F27 Motor sound (sound tone)
Frequency: This function sets the frequency at startup.
F 2 7 M T R
F 2 4 H O L D I N G
Setting range: 0.1 to 10.0 seconds

Holding time: This function sets the holding time during
which the start frequency is sustained at startup.
The holding time does not apply during switching
between forward and reverse.
The holding time is not included in the acceleration time.
The holding time also applies when pattern operation
(C21) is selected. The holding time is included in the
timer value.
F 2 5 S T O P
T O N E
Setting range: 0 , 1, 2 , 3
The tone of motor noise can be altered if the carrier
frequency is 7 kHz or lower. Use this function as required.
F30 FMA terminal (voltage adjustment)

F31 FMA terminal (function selection)
F 3 0 F MA
V A D J
Setting range: 0 to 200%

Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can be
output to terminal FMA as a DC voltage. The amplitude of
the output can also be adjusted.
This function adjusts the voltage value of the monitor item
selected in F31 when the monitor amount is 100%. A
value from 0 to 200% can be set in 1% increments.
H z
Setting range: 0.1 to 6.0 Hz

This function sets the frequency at stop.
The operation will not start if the starting frequency is

less than the stopping frequency or if the set frequency
is less than the stopping frequency.
F26 Motor sound (carrier frequency)

F 2 6 M T R
S O U N D
This function adjusts the carrier frequency to prevent

resonance with the machine system, reduce motor and
drive noise, and also reduce leakage current from output
circuit wiring.
Drive Capacity
75 Hp or less
100 Hp or more
Carrier frequency
Motor noise
Output current waveform
Leakage current
Noise occurrence
F 3 1 F MA
This function selects the monitor item to be output to

Terminal FMA.
Value
0
Setting Range
0.75 to 15kHz
0.75 to 10kHz
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Low High
High Low
Bad Good
Small amount Large amount
Extremely low High
F U N C
5-15
Monitor Item
Output frequency 1
(before slip
compensation)
Output frequency 2
(after slip
compensation)
Output current
Output voltage
Output torque
Load rate
Output
PID feedback amount
PG feedback amount
(only when option
is installed)
DC link circuit voltage
10
Universal AO
100% Monitor Amount

Maximum output
frequency
Maximum output
frequency
2x rated output current of drive
230V series: 250V
460V series: 500V
2x rated motor torque
2x rated load of motor
2x rated drive output
Feedback amount at 100%
Synchronous speed at
maximum frequency
230V series: 500V
460V series: 1,000V
Output from RS485 or Bus option
F33 FMP terminal (pulse rate)

F34 FMP terminal (voltage adjustment)
F35 FMP terminal (function selection)
F36 30Ry operation mode

F 3 6 3 0 R Y
Monitor data (e.g., output frequency, output current) can

be output to terminal FMP as pulse voltage. Monitor
data can also be sent to an analog meter as average
voltage.
When sending data to a digital counter or other instrument as pulse output, set the pulse rate in F33 to any
value and the voltage in F34 to 0%.
When data is sent to an analog meter or other instrument as average voltage, the voltage value set in F34
determines the average voltage, and F33 is fixed at 2670
(p/s).
F 3 3 F MP
P L U S E S
The F33 function sets the pulse frequency of the monitor

item selected in F35.
Value
0
Drive no power
At normal
At alarm
Drive no power
At normal
At alarm
Operation
30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
30A - 30C: ON, 30B - 30C:OFF
30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
30A - 30C: ON, 30B - 30C: OFF
30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON
If the set value is 1, contacts 30A and 30C are connected

when the drive control voltage is established (about one
second after power on).
F 4 0 D R V
F 4 1 B RK
T R Q I
T R Q I
The torque limit operation calculates motor torque from

the output voltage, current and the primary resistance
value of the motor, and controls the frequency so the
calculated value does not exceed the limit. This operation enables the drive to continue operation under the
limit even if a sudden change in load torque occurs.
Pulse frequency (p/s) = 1/T
Limits are set for driving torque and braking torque.
Duty (%) = T1/T x 100
When this function is activated, acceleration and

deceleration operation times are longer than the set
values.
Average voltage (V) = 15.6 x T1/T
V A D J
Function
Torque
limit
(driving)
Set value 0%: The pulse frequency varies depending on

the amount of the monitor item selected in F35 (max.
value is the value set in F33).
The F34 function sets the average voltage of pulse
output to terminal FMP.
Torque
limit
(braking)
1 to 200%: Pulse frequency is fixed at 2,670 p/s. The

average voltage of the monitor item selected in F35,
when the monitor amount is 100%, is adjusted in the
range 1 - 200%, in 1% increments (pulse duty varies).
F 3 5 F MP
This function specifies whether to activate (excite) the

alarm output relay (30Ry) for any fault at normal or alarm
status.
F40 Torque limit 1 (drive)

F41 Torque limit 1 (brake)
Set values: 300 to 6,000 p/s, in 1 p/s increments
F 3 4 F MP
MO D E
Set Value
20% to 200%
Operation
The torque is limited
to the set value.
999
20% to 200%
Torque limiting inactive

The torque is limited to
the set value.
Automatically prevents
OU trip due to power
regeneration effect
Torque limiting inactive
999
F U N C
The F35 function selects the monitor item to be output to

terminal FMP.
The set value and monitor items are the same as those
used for F31 (refer to table).
5-16
WARNING
When the torque limit function is selected, an
operation may not match the set acceleration and
deceleration time or set speed. The machine should
be so designed that safety is ensured even when
operation does not match the set values.
F42 Torque vector control 1

F 4 2 T RQ V E C T O R 1
To obtain the most efficient motor torque, the torque

vector control calculates torque according to load, to
adjust the voltage and current vectors to optimum values
based on the calculated value.
Value
Operation
inactive
active
Related Functions P01 to P09
If F42 = 1 (active), the following functions are affected:

1.
2.
F09 Torque boost 1 is automatically set to 0.0

(automatic torque boosting).
P09 Slip compensation control is automatically
activated. If set to 0.0, the amount of slip compensation for a standard 3-phase Fuji motor is applied.
Otherwise, the set value is applied.
Use the torque vector control function under the following

conditions:
1. There can only be one motor.
Connection of two or more motors makes accurate
control difficult.
2. The function data (rated current P03, no-load current
P06,, %R1 P07, and %X P08) for Motor 1 must be
correct.
If a standard 3-phase GE motor is used, setting the
capacity (Function P02) ensures entry of the above
data. An auto-tuning operation should be performed
for other motors.
3. The rated current of the motor must not be significantly less than the rated current of the drive. A
motor two sizes lower in capacity than the nominal
motor indicated for the drive is the smallest that
should be used.
4. To prevent leakage current and ensure accurate
control,, the length of the cable between the drive and
motor should not exceed 50 m.
5. If a reactor is connected between the drive and the
motor and wiring impedance cannot be disregarded,
use P04 Auto tuning to reset data.
If these conditions are not satisfied, set F42 = 0 (Inactive).
5-17
E: Extension Terminal Functions

E01 Terminal X1
E09 Terminal X9
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
Multi-step frequency selection
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Value 0,1, 2, 3: The frequency can be switched to a

preset frequency in function codes C05 to C19 by
switching the external digital input signal. Assign values
0 to 3 to the target digital input terminal. The combination of input signals determines the frequency.
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Functions can be individually set from each of the digital

input terminals X1 to X9.
Value
0,1,2,3
4,5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
Function
Multi-step frequency selection (1 to 15 steps)
Acceleration and deceleration time selection (3 steps)
Self-hold selection (HLD)
Coast-to-stop command (BX)
Alarm reset (RST)
External alarm (THR)
Jogging (JOG)
Frequency setting 2 / Frequency setting 1 (Hz 2 / Hz1)
Motor 2 / Motor 1 (M2 / M1)
DC injection brake command (DCBRK)
Torque limit 2 / Torque limit 1 (TL2 / TL1)
Switching operation from line to drive (50 Hz) (SW50)
Switching operation from line to drive (60 Hz) (SW60)
UP command (UP)
DOWN command (DOWN)
Edit permission command (data change permission) (WE-KP)
PID control cancellation (Hz / PID)
Normal/Inverse switching (Terminals 12 and C1) (IVS)
Interlock (52-2) (IL)
Torque control cancellation (Hz/TRQ)
Link operation selection (Standard: RS485, Option: BUS) (LE)
Universal DI (U-DI)
Pick up start mode (STM)
SY-PG enable (PG/Hz)
Zero speed command (ZERO)
Timed alarm stop command (STOP1)
Timed alarm stop command with
Deceleration time 4 (STOP2)
Pre-exciting command (EXCITE)
Combination of
Input Signals
3
2
1
(SS8) (SS4) (SS2)
off
off
off
off
off
on
off
off
on
off
on
off
off
on
off
off
on
on
off
on
on
on
off
off
on
off
off
on
off
on
on
off
on
on
on
off
on
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
Selected Frequency
0
(SS1)
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
C05 MULTI Hz-1

C06 MULTI Hz-2
Related
C07 MULTI Hz-3 Functions:
C08 MULTI Hz-4
C05-C19
C09 MULTI Hz-5
C10 MULTI Hz-6
Setting
C11 MULTI Hz-7
Setting
C12 MULTI Hz-8
0.00 to
C13 MULTI Hz-9 - 400.00 Hz
C14 MULTI Hz-10
C15 MULTI Hz-11
C16 MULTI Hz-12
C17 MULTI Hz-13
C18 MULTI Hz-14
C19 MULTI Hz-15
Acceleration and Deceleration time selection

Value 4, 5: The acceleration and deceleration time can
be switched to a preset time in function codes E10 to
E15 by switching the external digital input signal. Assign
values 4 and 5 to the target digital input terminal. The
combination of input signals determines the acceleration
and deceleration times.
Combination
of Input Signals
5
4
(RT2)
(RT1)
off
off
off
on
on
off
on
on
Selected Acceleration /
Deceleration Times
F07 ACC TIME1

F08 DEC TIME1
E10 ACC TIME2
E11 DEC TIME2
E12 ACC TIME3
E13 DEC TIME3
E14 ACC TIME4
E15 DEC TIME4
Related
Functions
E10-E15
Setting Range
0.01 to 3600s
Note: Values which are not set in the functions from E01
to E09 are assumed to be inactive.
5-18

Value 6: This selection is used for 3-wire operation. The
FWD or REV signal is self-held when HLD-CM is on, and
this self-hold is cleared when HLD-CM is turned off. To
use this HLD terminal function, assign 6 to the target
digital input terminal.
operation is performed with the jogging frequency set in

function code C20 while the operation command (FWDCM or REV-CM) is on. To use this JOG terminal function,
assign 10 to the target digital input terminal.
Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1

Value 11: This function switches the frequency setting
method defined by function codes F01 and C30 using an
external digital input signal.
Input Signal
11
off
on
Selected Frequency Setting

F01 FREQ CMD1
C30 FREQ CMD2
Motor 2/Motor 1
Value 12: This function switches motor constants using
an external digital input signal.
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
HLD
This input is effective only when the operation command

to the drive is off and operation has stopped and does
not apply to the operation at 0Hz.
STOP
CM
Input Signal
12
off
on

Value 7: When BX and CM are connected, drive output is
cut off immediately, and the motor starts to coast to a
stop. An alarm signal is neither output nor self-held. If
BX and CM are disconnected when the operation
command (FWD or REV) is on, operation begins at the
start frequency. To use this BX terminal function, assign
value 7 to the target digital input terminal.
Output
Frequency
F WD-CM
Forward
rotation
Forward
rotation
Forward
rotation
Ignored
ON
ON
REV-CM
BX-CM
ON
ON
ON
Selected Motor
Motor 1
Motor 2
Related Functions: A01-A18
DC injection brake command (DCBRK)

Value 13: This function is used for DC Brake time control
by digital input including extending braking operation
during stopping as well as during start up into a rotating
load. When the external digital input signal is on, DC
injection braking starts when the drives output frequency
drops below the frequency preset in function code F20
after the operation command goes off. (The operation
command goes off when the STOP key is pressed during
keypad panel operation or when both terminals FWD and
REV go off during terminal block operation.) The DC
injection braking continues while the digital input signal
is on. In this case, the longer of the following times is
selected:
Alarm reset (RST)
- The time set with function code F22
Value 8: If a drive trip occurs, connecting RST to CM

clears the alarm output (for any fault). Disconnecting
them clears the trip indication and restarts operation. To
use this RST terminal function, assign value 8 to the
target digital input terminal.
- The time during which the input signal is set ON
External alarm (THR)
Input Signal
13
off
on
Value 9: Disconnecting THR and CM during operation

cuts off drive output (i.e., motor starts to coast to a stop)
and outputs alarm OH2, which is self-held internally and
cleared by RST input. This function is used to protect an
external brake resistor and other components from
overheating. To use this THR terminal function, assign
value 9 to the target digital input terminal. ON input is
assumed if this terminal function is not set.
Output
Frequency
Jogging (JOG)
DCBRK-CM
DC injection brake command not given

DC injection brake command given
DC Brake
Frequency
ON
DC Brake
FWD-CM
Value 10: This function is used for jogging operation to

position a workpiece. When JOG and CM are connected, the
Selected Operation
5-19
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Torque limit 2/torque limit 1

Value 14: Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1. This
function switches the torque limit value set with function
codes F40, F41, E16, and E17, using an external digital
input signal.
Input Signal
14
off
on
Selected Torque Limit Value

F40 DRV TRQ1
F41 BRK TRQ1
E16 DRV TRQ2
E17 DRV TRQ2
Related Functions
F40-F41, E16-E17
Setting Range
DRV 20 to 200% ,999
BRK0, 20 to 200%, 999
Switching operation from line drive

(60Hz)(SW60)/(50Hz)(SW50)
Value 15, 16: Motor operation can be switched from 60
Hz/50 Hz commercial power to drive operation without
stopping the motor by switching the external digital input
signal.
Input Signal
16
off > on
on > off
Function
Drive operation to line operation (60 Hz)/(50 Hz)
Line operation to drive operation (60 Hz)/(50 Hz)
The change ranges from 0 to maximum frequency.

Operation in the opposite direction of the operation
command is not allowed.
on
on
Selected Function
Prohibit data changes
Allow data changes
Value 20: The PID control can be disabled by an external

digital input signal.
Value 17, 18: When an operation command is input (on),

the output frequency can be increased or decreased
using an external digital input signal.
off
19
off
on
PID control cancellation (Hz/PID)
UP command (UP)/DOWN command (DOWN)
on
Value 19: This function allows the data to be changed

only when input is received from an external signal,
thereby preventing function code data changes.
Note: If a terminal is assigned the value 19, the data

cannot be changed. To change data, turn the terminal on
and change its setting to another number.
Following a momentary power failure, if the digital input

signal goes off, 50 or 60 Hz (according to the input
signal) is output after the restart waiting time (function
code H13). The motor is then directed to drive operation.
Combination
of Input Signals
18
17
off
off
off
on
Edit permission command (data change

permission)(WE-KP)
Input Signal
20
off
on
Selected Function
[Related Functions: H20-H25]
Enable PID control
Disable PID control
(When the PID control is disabled, the frequency is set

from keypad panel)
Normal operation/inverse
Selected Function
(when operation command is on)
Holds the output frequency
Increases the output frequency
according to the acceleration time
Decreases the output frequency
according to the deceleration time
Holds the output frequency
Value 21: Analog input (Terminals 12 and C1) can be

switched between normal and inverse operations using an
external digital input signal.
Input Signal
21
off
on
There are the two types of UP/DOWN operations as

shown below. Select the desired type by setting the
frequency (F01 or C30).
Selected Function
[Related Function: F01]
Normal operation if normal operation is
set and vice versa
Inverse operation if normal operation is
set and vice versa
Interlock (52-2)
Value 22: When a contactor is installed on the output side
of the drive, the contactor opens at the time of a momentary power failure. This prevents the reduction of the DC
circuit voltage and may prevent the detection of a power
failure and a correct restart operation after power is
recovered. The restart operation, in the event of a
momentary power failure, can be performed effectively
with power failure information provided by an external
digital input signal.
5-20
Input Signal
22
off
on
Function
No momentary power failure detection by
digital input
Momentary power failure detection by
digital input
Torque control cancellation (Hz/TRQ)

Value 23: If function code H18 Torque control is set to
active (value = 1 or 2), this operation can be cancelled
externally by assigning 23 to the target digital input
terminal and switching between active and inactive for
this input signal.
Input Signal
23
off
Selected Function
[Related Function: H18]
Torque control function active the input voltage to
Terminal 12 is the torque command value
on
Torque control function inactive - the input voltage to

Terminal 12 is the frequency command value. PID
feedback amount when PID control operation is
selected (H20 = 1 or 2).
SY-PG enable (PG/Hz)

Value 27: This selects the closed loop control with PG
(encoder) or open loop control.
Input Signal
27
off
on
Operation Select
open loop control
close loop control
Note: PG Option Card is required for this function
Zero speed command (zero)

Value 29: This function is used for stall torque operation
with vector control at zero.
Input Signal
29
off
on
Selected Function
zero speed control disabled
zero speed control enabled
Link Operation selection (LE)
Timed alarm stop command (STOP1)

Timed alarm stop command with deceleration
time 4 (STOP2)
Value 24: Frequency and operation commands from the

data communications link can be enabled or disabled by
switching the external digital input signal. Select the
command source in H30-Link function and assign 24 to
the target digital input terminal to enable or disable
commands in this input signal state.
Value 30, 31: Disconnecting STOP1 and CM during

operation, the drive decelerates and stops by a present
deceleration time (STOP1)/deceleration time 4 (STOP2)
setting and then outputs alarm Er6 which is latched
internally and cleared by RST input. ON input is assumed
when this terminal function is not set.
Input Signal
24
off
on
Selected Function
Link command disabled
Link command enabled
Universal DI (U-DI)
Value 25: Assigning 25 to a digital input terminal renders
the terminal a universal DI terminal. The ON/OFF state of
signal input to this terminal can be checked through the
RS485 and BUS option.
This input terminal is only used to check for an incoming
input signal through communication and does not affect
drive operation.
Pick up start mode (STM)

Value 26: The (pick-up start mode): in function code H09
can be enabled or disabled by switching the external
digital input signal. Assign 26 to the target digital input
terminal to enable or disable the function in this input
signal state.
Input Signal
26
off
on
Pre-exciting command (EXCITE)

Value 32: When EXCITE transition ON, the motor enters
into a pre-exciting state during flux vector control mode.
When an operation command (FWD or REV) is initiated,
the motor returns from the pre-exciting state to the
ordinary state.
Digital
Value
Input
Terminal X1
0
Terminal X2
1
Terminal X3
2
Terminal X4
3
Terminal X5
4
Terminal X6
5
Terminal X7
6
Terminal X8
7
Terminal X9
8
Selected Function
Start characteristic function disabled
Start characteristic function enabled
5-21
Factory Settings at Shipment

Description
Multi-step frequency selection (SS1)
Acceleration and deceleration selection (RT1)
Acceleration and deceleration selection (RT2)
Alarm reset (RST)
E10 Acceleration time 2

E11 Deceleration time 2
E
E
E
E
E
E
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
A
D
A
D
A
D
C
E
C
E
C
E
C
C
C
C
C
C
T
T
T
T
T
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
M
M
M
M
M
M
E20 Terminal Y1 (function selection)

E24 Terminals Y5A and Y5C (funtion selection)
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
2
2
3
3
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
The operation and setting ranges are the same as those

for Acceleration time1 and Deceleration time1. See
explanations for F07 and F08.
For switching acceleration and deceleration times, select
any two terminals (from Terminal X1 in E01 to Terminal X9
in E09) as switching signal input terminals. Set the
selected terminals to 4 (acceleration and deceleration
time1) and 5 (acceleration and deceleration time2) and
input a signal to each terminal to switch acceleration and
deceleration times. Switching is possible during
acceleration, deceleration, or constant speed operation.
Example: When Terminals X2 and X3 are set to 4 and 5:
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
E16 Torque limit 2 (drive)

E17 Torque limit 2 (brake)
T R Q
T R Q
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
2
3
4
5
F
F
F
F
F
U
U
U
U
U
N
N
N
N
N
C
C
C
C
C
Some control and monitor signals can be selected and

output from terminals Y1 to Y5. Terminals Y1 to Y4 use
transistor output; terminals Y5A and Y5C use relay
contacts.
Acceleration time1 (F07) and Deceleration time1 (F08), as

well as three other acceleration and deceleration times,
can be selected.
E 1 6 D R V
E 1 7 B RK
0
1
2
3
4
Output Signal
Drive Running (RUN)
Frequency arrival (FAR)
Frequency detection (FDT1)
Stopping due to undervoltage (LV)
Torque polarity detection (B/D)
Torque limiting (TL)
Restart after momentary power failure (IPF)
Overload - early warning (OLI)
Keypad panel operation (KP)
Drive stopping (STP)
Ready for operation (RDY)
Switching between line and drive (SW88)
Switching between line and drive (SW52-2)
Switching between line and drive (SW52-1)
Motor 2 switching (SWM2)
Terminal AX function (AX)
Pattern operation stage change (TU)
Pattern operation cycle operation completed (TO)
Pattern operation stage number (STG1)
Alarm detail (AL1)
Alarm detail (AL2)
Alarm detail (AL4)
Alarm detail (AL8)
Cooling fan operating (FAN)
Retry function operating (TRY)
Universal DO (U-DO) *
Heat sink overheat - early warning (OH)
Synchronization completed by synchronous operation
card (SY) *
unused
2nd Freq. level detection (FDT2)
2nd OL level early warning (OL2)
Terminal C1 off signal (C1OFF)
Note: For output signals marked *, refer to instruction

manuals for RTU communication and the synchronous
operation card.
2
2
This function is used to switch the torque limit level set

by F40 and F41, using an external control signal. Input
an external signal by setting any of the digital input
terminals (X1 to X9) to 14 for Torque limit 2 / Torque limit
1 in E01 to E09.
5-22
Drive running (RUN)

Value 0: The RUN signal is output when there is output
speed (drive is outputting a frequency). When the DC
injection brake function is active, the RUN signal is off.
For setting procedure, see E33 Overload early warning

(operation selection) and E34 Overload early warning
(operation level).
Note: This function is only effective for Motor 1.
Keypad panel operation
Value 1: See the explanation for function code E30

(frequency arrival [detection width]).
Value 8: An ON signal is output when the operation

command keys (FWD, REV and STOP) on the keypad
panel can be used (i.e., F02 Operation = 0) to issue
operation and stop commands.
Frequency detection (FDT1)

Value 2: See the explanation for function codes E31 and
E32 (frequency detection).
Stopping due to undervoltage (LV)

Value 3: If the undervoltage protective function activates,
i.e. if the main circuit DC voltage falls below the
undervoltage detection level, an ON signal is output. The
signal goes off when the voltage recovers and increases
above the detection level. The ON signal is retained as
long as the undervoltage protective function is active.
Undervoltage detection level:
230V series: 200V

460V series: 400V
Torque polarity detection (B/D)

Value 4: This function determines the torque polarity
calculated in the drive and outputs a signal indicating
driving or braking torque. An OFF signal is output for
driving torque; an ON signal is output for braking torque.
Torque limiting (TL)

Value 5: When torque limiting is active, the stall prevention function is automatically activated to change the
output frequency. The torque limiting signal is output to
lighten the load and also used to display overload
conditions on the monitor device. This ON signal is
output while the current or torque is limited or power
regeneration is prevented.
Restart after momentary power failure (IPF)

Value 6: Following a momentary power failure, this
function reports the start of restart mode, the occurrence
of an automatic pull-in, and the completion of the
recovery operation.
Following a momentary power failure, an ON signal is
output when power is recovered and a synchronization
(pull-in) operation is performed. The signal goes off after
a frequency level equal to that prior to power failure has
been recovered.
For 0 Hz restart at power recovery, no signal is output
because synchronization ends when power is recovered.
The frequency is not recovered to the level before the
power failure occurred.
Overload early warning (OL1)

Value 7: Before the motor is stopped by a trip operation
of an electronic thermal O/L relay, this function outputs
an ON signal when the load reaches the overload early
warning level.
Drive stopping (STOP)

Value 9: This function outputs an inverted signal to RUN
to indicate zero speed. An ON signal is output when the
DC injection brake function is operating.
Ready for operation (RDY)

Value 10: This function outputs an ON signal when the
drive is ready to operate. The drive is ready to operate
after the main circuit and control circuit power have been
established where the drive protective function is not
activated.
About one second is required from power-on to ready for
operation under normal conditions.
Switching between the AC line and the drive

(SW88)(SW52-2)(SW52-1)
Value 11, 12, 13: To perform a transfer between the line
and the drive, the relay sequence can be accomplished
using values 11, 12 and 13 on the Y outputs. These
values will provide outputs that can be used for opening
and closing contactors in the transfer sequence. For a
detailed explanation of these outputs please refer to the
factory.
Motor 2 switching (SWM2)

Value 14: When a signal for switching to Motor 2 is input
from the terminal selected by Terminals X1 to X9, this
function selects and outputs the signal to switch the
magnetic contactor for the motor. Since this switching
signal is not output during running, including when the DC
injection braking function is operating, a signal must be reinput after output stops.

Value 15: When an operation command (FWD or REV) is
entered, this function outputs an ON signal. When a stop
command is entered, the signal goes off after drive output
stops. When a coast-to-stop command is entered, and
the drive protective function is operating, the signal goes
off immediately.
Pattern operation stage change (TU)

Value 16: When the pattern operation stage changes, this
function outputs a one-shot, 100ms ON signal to report a
stage change.
Either the electronic thermal O/L relay early warning or

output current overload early warning can be selected.
5-23
Pattern operation cycle operation completed

(TO)
Universal DO(U-DO)
Value 27: Assigning a value of 27 to a transistor output
terminal renders the terminal a universal DO terminal.
Value 17: After the seven stages of a pattern operation

have been completed, this function outputs a one-shot,
100 ms ON signal to report the completion of all stages.
This function enables ON/OFF through the RS485 and

BUS option.
Pattern operation stage number

(STG1)(STG2)(STG4)
This function serves only to turn the transistor output on

or off through communication and is not related to drive
operation.
Value 18, 19, 20: During pattern operation, this function

reports the stage (operation process) being operated.
Pattern
Operation
Stage No.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 5
Stage 6
Stage 7
Heat sink overheat early warning (OH)

Value 28: This function outputs an early warning signal
when the heat sink temperature (overheat detection level)
is within 10C of the overtemp trip point.
Output Terminal
STG1
on
off
on
off
on
off
on
STG2
off
on
on
off
off
on
on
STG4
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
Synchronization completed by synchronous

operation card (SY)
Value 29: This is the synchronization complete signal for
the synchronize operation option. See Option Instruction
Book for details.
When pattern operation is not activated (i.e., no stage has

been selected), the terminals do not output a signal.
Alarm detail (AL1)(AL2)(AL4)(AL8)

Value 21, 22, 23, 24: This function reports the operating
status of the drive protective function.
Alarm Detail
(Drive Protective Function
2nd Freq. level detection (FDT2)

Vallue 31: This function sets the 2nd Freq. level detection.
See the explanation of Function Code E36 and E37
Hysteresis width is same as FDT1 (E32).
2nd OL level early warning (OL2)

Value 32: This function sets the 2nd overload early
warning. See the explanation of overload early warning
(OL), E37.
Output Terminal
AL1 AL2 AL4 AL8
Overcurrent, ground fault, blown fuse
on
off
off
off
Overvoltage
Undervoltage shortage, input phase
failure
Motor 1 and Motor 2 overload
drive overload
Heat sink overheating, drive
overheating internally
External alarm input, braking resistor
overheating
Memory error, CPU error
Keypad panel communication error,
option communication error
Option error
Output wiring error
RTU communication error
Overspeed, PG disconnection
off
on
off
off
Terminal C1 off signal (C1OFF)
on
on
off
off
off
on
off
off
on
on
off
off
Value 33: This function outputs an ON signal, when the

C1 current input is smaller than 2mA.
off
on
on
off
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
on
on
off
off
on
off
off
on
off
on
off
off
on
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
SETTINGS WHEN SHIPPED FROM THE FACTORY

Digital Output
Value
Factory Setting at Shipment

Description
Terminal Y1
Operating (RUN)
Terminal Y2
Terminal Y3
Frequency detection (FDT)
Terminal Y4
Overload early warning (OL)
Terminal Y5
15
Under normal operation, terminals do not output a signa
Cooling fan operating (FAN)
E25 Y5 Ry operation mode
Value 25: When used with H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF

control, this function outputs a signal while the cooling fan
is operating.
E 2 5 Y 5 R Y
Retry function operating (TRY)

Value 26: When H04 Retry operating is set to 1 or higher,
the signal is output during the retry operation, if the drive
protective function has been activated.
MO D E
This function specifies whether to excite the Y5 relay at

ON signal mode or OFF signal mode
Set Value
0
Operation
At OFF signal mode Y5A - Y5C: OFF
At ON signal mode Y5A - Y5C: ON
At OFF signal mode Y5A - Y5C: ON

At ON signal mode Y5A - Y5C: OFF
5-24
When the set value is 1, contacts Y5A and Y5C are

connected when the drive control voltage is established
(about one second after power on).
E30 Frequency arrival (detection width)

E 3 0 F AR
H YS T R

This function adjusts the detection width when the output
frequency is the same as the set operating frequency. The
detection width can be adjusted from 0 to 10 Hz of the
setting frequency.
E33 Overload early warning (operation)

E 3 3 O L
L E V E L
Set value 0: Electronic thermal O/L relay
Select one of the following two types of overload early

warning: early warning by electronic thermal O/L relay
function or early warning by output current.
1: Output current
Value
0
Function
Electronic
thermal
O/L relay
Description
Overload early warning by electronic thermal
O/L relay (with inverse time characteristics)
to output current. The operation selection and
thermal time constant for the inverse time
characteristics are the same as those of the
electronic thermal O/L relay for motor
protection (F10 and F12).
Output
current
An overload early warning is issued when

output current exceeds the set current value
for the set time.
When the frequency is within the detection width, an ON

signal can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to
[Y5]
1
E34 Overload early warning (operation level)

E 3 4 O L 1
L E V E L
Setting range: Drive rated output current x (5 to 200%)
This function determines the operation level for the

electronic thermal O/L relay or output current.
The operation release level is 90% of the set value.
E35 Overload early warning (operation time)

E 3 5 O L
T I M E R
E31 Frequency detection (operation level)

E32 Frequency detection (hysteresis width)
E 3 1 F D T
E 3 2 F D T
Sets the time from when the operation level is attained

until the overload early warning function is activated.
L E V E L
H Y S T R
Setting range (Operation level): 0 to 400 Hz

These functions determine the operation level of the
output frequency and hysteresis width for operation
release. If the output frequency exceeds the set operation
level, an ON signal can be output from terminals Y1 to Y5.
(Hysteresis width): 0.0 to 30.0 Hz
This function is used when E33 Overload early warning

(operation selection) is set to 1.
E36 Frequency detection 2 (operation level)

E 3 6 F D T 2
L E V E L
This function determines the operation (detection) level 2

of the output frequency for operation release. This
function operates the same as E31 Frequency detection
1 (operation level). For details, see the explanation for
E31.
E37 Overload early warning 2

(operationlevel)
E 3 7 O L 2
L E V E L
This function determines the operation level 2 of the

output current. This function operates same as E33
output current and E35 setting.
5-25
Display during running and stopping

During running, the items selected in E43 LED monitor
(display selection) are displayed. In E44 LED monitor
(display at stopping), specify whether to display selected
items or the same items as during running.
E40 Display coefficient A

E41 Display coefficient B
E 4 0 C OE F
E 4 1 C OE F
A
B
Value of
E43
Setting range:
E44 = 0
Display coefficient A: -999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00

Display coefficient B: -999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00
at stopping
These coefficients are conversion coefficients which are

used to determine the load and line speed and the PID
controller target value and feedback (process) amount
displayed on the LED monitor.
Although the setting range is 999.00, the effective range

of display data is 0.01 to 200.00. Therefore, values
smaller or larger than this range are limited to a minimum
value of 0.01 or a maximum value of 200.00.
2
3
4
5
Target value and feedback amount of PID controller
Set the maximum value of display data in E40 Display

coefficient A and the minimum value in E41 Display
coefficient B.
7
8
9
10
11
12
Displayed value = (target value or feedback amount)

x (Display coefficient A - B) + B
during
during
at stopping
running
running
output frequency after slip
compensation (Hz)
set
frequency
value (Hz)
output frequency after slip
set
compensation (Hz)
frequency
value (Hz)
set frequency value (Hz)
output current (A)
output voltage command value (V)
synchronous synchronous speed (rpm)
speed set
value (rpm)
line speed
line speed (m/min)
set value
(m/min)
load speed (rpm)
set load
speed (rpm)
Load and line speed

Use display coefficient A.
Displayed value = output frequency x (0.01 to 200.00)
E44 = 1
calculated torque value (%)

output power (kW)
PID target value 1 (direct input from keypad panel)
PID target value 2 (input from F02 Frequency 1)
PID feedback amount
Note: For E43 = 10 to 12, the data is displayed only if

selected in H20 PID control (operation selection).
E42 Display filter
Display at frequency setting
E 4 2 D I S P L A Y
When a set frequency is checked or changed by the

keypad panel, the value shown below is displayed.
F L

Among data in E43 LED monitor (display selection), some
data need not be displayed instantaneously when the data
changes. For such data, a flicker suppression filter can be
used.
Display
Output current
Output voltage
Value
8
9
Display
Calculated torque value
Power consumption
E43 LED monitor (display selection)

E44 LED monitor (display at stopping)
E 4 3 L E D
E 4 4 L E D
Value of E43
0,1,2,3,4
Monitored items in E43 LED monitor (display selection)

Value
3
4
Select the display item by using E43 LED monitor (display

selection). This display is not affected by E44 LED monitor
(display at stopping).
Frequency Setting
set value of frequency (Hz)
set value of synchronous speed (rpm)
set value of line speed (m/min.)
set value of load speed (rpm)
8,9
10,11,12
Note: For E43 = 10 to 12 the data is displayed only if

selected in H20 PID control (operation selection).
MN T
MN T 2
The data during drive operation, stopping, at frequency

setting, and at PID setting is displayed on the LED.
5-26
E45 LCD monitor (display selection)
E46 LCD monitor (language)
E 4 5 L CD
E 4 6 L AN GU A G E
MN T R
This function selects the items to be displayed on the

LCD monitor in operation mode.
Value
Display Items
Operation status, direction of rotation,

operation guide
Output frequency before slip compensation,

output current, calculated torque in bar graph
Set value: 0
During running
When stopping
This function selects the language for data display on the

ELCD4monitor.
6
Value
40 7
1
2
Language
Japanese
English
German
Value
3
4
5
Language
French
Spanish
Italian
Note: English language is used for all LCD screens in

this manual.
E47 LCD monitor (contrast adjustment)

E 4 7 C ON T R A S T
60.00
60.00
RUN
STOP
This function adjusts the LCD contrast. Increase the set

value to raise contrast and decrease to lower contrast.
FWD
PRG
PRG
MENU
F/D
LED SHIFT
Value
Screen
Set value: 1
60.00
Hz
A
%
Fout/Iout/TRQ
Full scale value of bar graph

Display item
Full scale
Output frequency
Maximum frequency
Output current
200% of drive rated value
Calculated torque value 200% of motor rated value
Note: The scale cannot be adjusted.
5-27
0, 1, 2 8, 9, 10
Low
High
C: Control Functions of Frequency

C01 Jump frequency 1
C04 Jump frequency hysteresis
C 0 1 J UM P
C 0 2 J UM P
C 0 3 J UM P
H z
H z
H z
C05-C19 Multi-step frequency 1 to 15

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
1
2
3
Set value 0 to 400 Hz in 1Hz increments (min.)

C 0 4 J UM P
H Y S T R
Set value 0 to 30 Hz in 1Hz increments (min.)

This function makes the set frequency jump so that the
drives output frequency does not match the mechanical
resonance point of the load.
Up to three jump points can be set.
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
Set value 0 to 400 Hz In 0.01 Hz increments (min.)
This function is ineffective if jump frequencies 1 to 3 are

set to 0 Hz.
Multistep frequencies 1 to 15 can be switched by turning

terminal functions SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8 on and off.
(See E01 to E09 for terminal function definitions.)
A jump does not occur during acceleration or deceleration.
OFF is the default value any undefined SS1, SS2, SS4,

and SS8 terminals.
If a jump frequency setting range overlaps another range,

both ranges are added to determine the actual jump area.
C13
C12
C14
C15
C10
Jump frequency 3
C16
C09
Output Frequency
(Hz)
C11
Jump frequency
width
Jump frequency
width
Jump frequency
width
Output frequency
(Hz)
Related functions: E01 to E09 (Set value: 0 to 3)
C17
C18
C08
Jump frequency 2
C07
C19
C06
Jump frequency 1
C05
Set frequency (Hz)
FWD-CM
ON
Output frequency
(Hz)
SS4-CM
Jump frequency 2
SS8-CM
SS2-CM
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Actual
jump width
Jump frequency
width
SS1-CM
ON
ON
ON
Jump frequency 1
Set frequency (Hz)
5-28
C20 Jog frequency

C 2 0 J OG
H z

This function sets a frequency for the motor jogging
operation, which is different from the normal operation.
The jogging frequency is used for operation when the
jogging mode signal is received from the keypad panel or
control terminal. For details, see the explanations of
E01 Terminal X1 to E09 Terminal X9.
C21 Pattern operation (operation selection)

C 2 1 P A T T E R N
Pattern operation is an automatic operation according to

a preset operation time, direction of rotation, acceleration and deceleration time, and frequency.
When using this function, set F01 Frequency setting to
10 (pattern operation).
[Related Functions: F01, C30 = 10]
The following operation patterns can be selected.
Value
0
1
2
Operation Pattern
Perform a pattern operation cycle, then stop
operation.
Perform pattern operation repeatedly.
Operation is stopped by the STOP operation.
Perform a pattern operation cycle, then
continue operation at the last set frequency.
C22-C28 Pattern operation (stage 1 to 7)

C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Seven stages are operated in order of function codes,

according to the values set in C22 Pattern operation
(stage 1) to C28 Pattern operation (stage 7). Each
function sets the operation time and the direction of
rotation for each stage and assigns values to acceleration
and deceleration time.
Set or assign item
Operation time
Rotation
direction
Acceleration and
deceleration time
Value range
0. 00 to 6000s
F: Forward (counterclockwise)
R: Reverse (clockwise)
1: Acceleration time 1 (F07)
Deceleration time 1 (F08)
2: Acceleration time 2 (E10)
Deceleration time 2 (E11)
Note: The operation time is represented by the three
most significant digits, hence, can be set with
only three high-order digits.
Setting example
100
3
Acceleration and deceleration
time (code): 3
Motor rotating direction:
Forward (counterclockwise)
Operation time: 100s
Set the operation time to 0.00 for any unused stages,

which are skipped during operation.
In regard to the set frequency value, the multi-step
frequency function is assigned according to the table
below. Seven frequencies can be set for C05 Multi-step
frequency 1 to C11 Multi-step frequency 7.
Stage No.
5-29
Operation Frequency
Stage 1
Multi-step frequency 1 (C05)
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 5
Stage 6
Stage 7
Pattern operation example

Function Value / Operation Frequency
Notes:
1.
C21
Selects function
C22 (stage 1)
60.0F2
C23 (stage 2)
100F1
C24 (stage 3)
65.5R4
C25 (stage 4)
55.0R3
C26 (stage 5)
50.0F2
C27 (stage 6)
72.0F4
C28 (stage 7)
35.0F2
2.
The direction of rotation cannot be reversed by a

command issued from the REV key on the keypad
panel or Terminal REV. Any reverse rotation commands entered will be canceled. Select forward or
reverse rotation by the data in each stage. If the
control terminals are used for operation, the self-hold
function will not work. Select an alternate type switch
when using control terminals.
At the end of a cycle, the motor decelerates to stop
according to the value set in F08 Deceleration time 1.
C30 Frequency setting 2

C 3 0 F R E Q
The following diagram shows this operation.
CMD
For the setting method, see the explanation for F01.

Notes: Setting 2, 3, and 7 are inactive. (C1 signals)
This function determines the frequency setting method.
C31 Analog input bias adjustment

The setting range is -100.0 to +100.0% (in 0.1% increments) of the maximum output frequency.
C32 Analog input gain adjustment

The gain adjustment range is 0.0 to 200%.
C 3 1O F F SE T
C 3 2O F F SE T
1 2
C 1
These functions set the gain and bias for analog input
Terminals 12 and C1, in conjunction with functions F17
(freq. gain) and F18 (freq. bias).
Example:
Running and stopping are controlled by pressing the

STOP or FWD keys or by opening and closing the control
terminals.
When using the keypad panel, the FWD key starts
operation. The STOP key pauses stage advance. Pressing
the FWD key again will restart operation from the stop
point according to the stages. If an alarm stop occurs,
press the RESET key to release the drive protective
function, then press the FWD key to restart stage advance.
If operation is to restart from the first stage, C22 Pattern
operation (stage 1), enter a STOP command and press
the RESET key.
If an alarm stop occurs, press the RESET key to release
the protective function, then press the RESET key again.
5-30
C33 Analog setting signal

C 3 3 R E F
F I L T E R

Analog signals input from Terminals 12, V2 or C1 may
contain noise which renders the control unstable. This
function adjusts the time constant of the input filter to
remove the effects of noise.
A value that is set too large delays control response
although stabilizing the control. A value that is set too
small speeds up control response but renders the control
unstable.
If the optimum value is not known, adjust the setting if
the control is unstable or response is delayed.
Note:
The set value is commonly applied to Terminals 12, V2
and C1. For input of PID feedback, the PID control
feedback filter (H25) is used.
5-31
Motor 1 (P: Motor Parameters)

Value
0
P01 Number of motor 1 poles

P 0 1 M 1
This function sets the number of poles in Motor 1. If this

setting is not made, an incorrect motor speed (synchronous speed) is displayed on the LED.
P02 Motor 1 (capacity)

P 0 2 M 1 CA P
Measure the motors primary resistance (%R1)

and base frequency leakage reactance (%X) when
the motor is stopping, measure the no-load current
(lo) when the motor is running, and automatically
store these values in P06, P07, and P08.
Perform auto tuning if the previously stored data in P06

No-load current, P07 %R1, and P08 %X differs from the
actual motor data. Some typical examples are listed
below. Auto tuning improves control and calculation
accuracy.
Set values for models with nominal motor capacity of

30Hp or less: 0.01 to 60Hp
Set values for models with nominal motor capacity of
40Hp or more: 0.01 to 800Hp
When a motor other than the GE standard 3-phase

motor is used, and accurate data is required for close
control.
When output-side impedance cannot be ignored, e.g.
when the cable between the drive and the motor is
too long or when a reactor is connected.
When %R1 or %X is unknown, e.g. when a nonstandard or special motor is used.
The nominal motor capacity is set at the factory. This

setting should only be changed when driving a motor with
a different capacity.
Set the nominal motor capacity listed in 9-1 Standard
Specifications. A value in the range from two ratings lower
to one rating higher than the nominal motor capacity can
be set. If a value outside this range is set, accurate
control cannot be guaranteed. If a value between two
nominal motor capacities is set, data for the lower
capacity is automatically stored for related function data.
If this function setting is changed, the following related
functions are automatically set to data values for the Fuji
3-phase standard motor.
Tuning Procedure
1.
2.
P03 Motor 1 (rated current)

P06 Motor 1 (no-load current)
P07 Motor 1 (% R1)
P08 Motor 1 (% X1)
3.
Note:
4.
The values for the GE 3-phase standard motor are 230V,

60Hz, 4 poles for the 230V series; 460V, 60Hz, 4 poles for
the 460V series.
5.
P03 Motor 1 (rated current)

P 0 3M 1 - I R
Set value: 0.00 to 2,000 A

This function sets the rated current value for Motor 1.
6.
P04 Motor 1 (Tuning)

P 0 4 M 1
Measure the motors primary resistance (%R1)

and base frequency leakage reactance (%X) when
the motor is stopping and automatically store both
values in P07 and P08.
PO L E S
Set values: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
Operation
Inactive
Adjust the voltage and frequency according to motor

data. Adjust functions F03 Maximum output frequency, F04 Base frequency, F05 Rated voltage, and
F06 Maximum output voltage.
First enter motor constants that cannot be tuned. Set
functions P02 Capacity, P03 Rated current, and P06
No-load current (no-load current setting is not
required if P04=2).
When tuning the no-load current, beware of motor
rotation.
Set function P04 Auto tuning = 1 (motor stop) or 2
(motor rotation). Press the FUNC/DATA key to store
the set value and press the FWD key or REV key.
Tuning will start.
Tuning may take several seconds. If P04=2, the motor
accelerates up to half the base frequency according
to acceleration time, is tuned for the no-load current,
and decelerates according to the deceleration time.
The total tuning time varies depending on the settings
for acceleration and deceleration time.
Press the STOP key, and the procedure will end.
Note: Use function A13 Motor 2 (auto tuning) to tune

Motor 2. In this case, the set values described in (1) and
(2) above are for functions A01, etc. corresponding to
Motor 2.
T U N 1
This function measures and automatically stores motor

data.
WARNING
If the auto tuning value is set to 2, the motor rotates
at a maximum of half the base frequency. Beware of
motor rotation as injury may result.
5-32
P05 Motor 1 (On-line Tuning)
P09 Slip compensation control
P 0 5 M 1
P 0 9 S L I P
T U N 2
Long-time operation affects motor temperature and motor

speed. On-line tuning minimizes speed changes related
to these temperature changes.
Value
Operation
Inactive
Active
P06 Motor 1 (no-load current)

P 0 6 M 1 I O
Set value: 0.00 to 2,000 A

This function sets the no-load current (exciting current) for
Motor 1.
Set value: 0.00 to 15.00 Hz

Changes in load torque affect motor slippage, thus
causing variations in motor speed. The slip compensation
control adds a frequency, proportional to motor torque, to
the drive output frequency. This will minimize variations in
motor speed due to changes in torque.
Calculate the amount of slip compensation using the
following formula:
= Base frequency X
%R 1
%X
These functions are used to set data if using a motor

other than the GE standard 3-phase motor and when the
motor constant and the impedance between the drive and
motor are known.
Calculate %R1 using the following formula:
R1 + CableR
X 100 [%]
V/( 3I)
R1: Primary coil resistance value of the motor [W]
Cable R: Output-side cable resistance value [W]
V: Rated voltage [V]
I: Rated current [A]
Rated current
%R1 =
%X =
X1 +X2 XM / (X2+XM) + Cable X
X 100 [%]
V/( 3I)
X1: Primary leakage reactance of the motor [W]
X2: Secondary leakage reactance (converted to a primary
value) of the motor [W]
XM: Exciting reactance of the motor [W]
Cable X: Output-side cable reactance [W]
V: Rated voltage [V]
I: Rated current [A]
Note:
For reactance, use a value from the data stored in F04
Base frequency 1.
When connecting a reactor or filter to the output circuit,
add its value. Use value 0 for cable values that can be
ignored.
Slippage [r/min.]
Synchronous speed [r/min.]
Slippage = Synchronous speed - Rated speed
P07 Motor 1 (%R1 setting)

P08 Motor 1 (%X setting)
P 0 7 M 1
P 0 8 M 1
C OM P 1
5-33
[Hz]
H: High Performance function

H03 Data initializing
H 0 3 D A T A
Set value
WARNING
When the retry function is selected, operation will
automatically restart, depending on the cause of
the stop. (The machine should be designed to
ensure safety during a restart.) When the retry
function is selected, GE start software
(F02 set 3 or 4) does not work.
I N I T
0: Disabled
1: Initializes data
This function returns all function data changed by the

customer to the original factory settings (initialization).
To perform initialization, press the STOP and ^ keys
together to set H03=1, then press the FUNC/DATA key.
The values for all functions are initialized. The set value
in H03 automatically returns to 0 following the end of
initialization.
H04 Auto-reset (Times)

H05 Auto-reset (Reset interval)
H 0 4 A U T O R E S E T
H 0 5 R E S E T
I N T
Set the protective function release count and waiting time

from its startup to release.
Setting range
(Count) : 0, 1 to 10
(Waiting time) : 2 to 20 seconds
When a drive protective function which invokes the retry
operation is activated, these functions release operation
of the protective function and restarts operation without
issuing an alarm or terminating output.
To disable the retry function, set H04 Retry (count) = 0.
H06 Fan stop operation
Drive protective functions that can invoke the retry

function:
OC1, OC2, OC3:
H 0 6 F A N
dBH:
Overcurrent
braking resistor overheating
OV1, OV2, OV3:
OL1:
Overvoltage
Motor 1 overload
OH1:
OL2:
Heat sink overheating
Motor 2 overload
OH3:
OLU:
Drive overheating
Drive overload
Set value
S T O P
0: ON/OFF control disabled

1: ON/OFF control enabled
This function specifies whether ON/OFF control for the

cooling fan is automatic. While power is applied to the
drive, the automatic fan control detects the temperature of
the heatsink and turns the fan on or off. When this control
is not selected, the cooling fan rotates continuously.
The cooling fan operating status can be monitored from
terminals Y1 to Y5.
internally
If the value of H04 Retry (count) is set from 1 to 10, a

drive run command is immediately entered following the
wait time set in H05 Retry (wait time) and the startup of
the retry operation. If the cause of the alarm has been
removed at this time, the drive starts without switching to
alarm mode. If the cause of the alarm still remains, the
protective function is reactivated according to the wait
time set in H05 Retry (waiting time). This operation is
repeated until the cause of the alarm is removed. The
restart operation switches to alarm mode when the retry
count exceeds the value set in H04 Retry (count). The
operation of the retry function can be monitored from
terminals Y1 to Y5.
5-34
H07 ACC/DEC (Mode select) pattern

H 0 7 A CC
P T N
Set value 0: Inactive (linear acceleration and deceleration)

1: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (mild)
2: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (sharp)
3: Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration
This function selects the acceleration and deceleration
pattern.
S-shape Acceleration and Deceleration
H09 Start mode
This pattern reduces shock by mitigating output frequency

changes at the beginning and end of acceleration and
deceleration.
H 0 9 S T A R T
MO D E
Setting range 0, 1, 2
This function smoothly catches a spinning motor which is
coasting after a momentary power failure or after the
motor has been subject to external force, without stopping the motor, i.e. windmilling fan.
At startup, this function detects the motor speed and
outputs the corresponding frequency, thereby enabling a
shock-free motor startup. The normal startup method is
used if the coasting speed of the motor is 120 Hz or more
as a drive frequency and if the value of F03 Maximum
frequency exceeds the value of F15 Frequency limiter
(upper limit).
Pattern constants>
When 1 is
selcted in H07
(mid S-shape
pattern)
Range of
0.05 x maximum
S-shaped
output
frequency (Hz)
0.10 x
Time for
acceleration
S-shaped at
acceleration time (s)
0.10 x
Time for
deceleration (s)
S-shaped at
deceleration
When 2 is selcted in
H07 (mid S-shape
pattern)
0.10 x maximum output
frequency (Hz)
0.20 x acceleration
time (s)
0.20 x deceleration (s)
When acceleration and deceleration times are very long or

short, acceleration and deceleration are almost linear.
Curvilinear Acceleration and Deceleration
This function is used to minimize motor acceleration and
deceleration times in the range that includes a constant
output range.
Output
frequency
acceleration
Maximum
output
deceleration
Value
Normal
startup
0
1
2
Inactive
Inactive
Active
Restart after a
momentary
power
failure
Inactive
Active
Active
Line-to-drive
switching
Inactive
Active
Active
Explanation
1.
This function is effective if F14 Restart after momentary power failure (operation selection) is set to 3, 4,
or 5. This function is also effective when operation is
switched from the line to the drive. The motor is
started with the same frequency as the current
coasting speed (speed search).
2. In addition to restarting following a momentary power
failure and switching between the line and the drive,
this function detects the coasting speed of the motor
and starts the motor at the same frequency as all
startups (including when an ON operation command
is entered).
By assigning 26 (start characteristics selection) to
terminals X1 to X9, this function can be externally
selected as the normal startup method whenever an ON
operation command is entered.
Set
frequency
Base
frequency
t [sec]
H08 Rev. phase sequence lock

H 0 8 R E V
Set value
L O C K
0: Inactive
1: Active
If accidental reversing could result in a malfunction, this

function can be set to prevent reversal.
This function prevents a reversing operation resulting from
a connection between the REV and CM terminals,
inadvertent activation of the REV key, or negative analog
input from Terminals 12 or V1.
Note: The dotted-dashed line indicates motor speed.

5-35
H10 Energy-saving operation
H13 Auto-restart (Restart time)
H 1 0 E N E RG Y
H 1 3 R E S T A R T
Set value 0: Inactive
S A V
1: Active
With constant-speed operation at light loads (fixed output

frequency), this function automatically reduces the output
voltage while minimizing the product of voltage and
current (power).
[Exception: If F09 Torque boost 1 = 0.0]
Notes:
Use this function for variable torque loads (e.g., fans,
pumps). If used for a constant torque load or rapidly
changing load, this function causes a delay in control
response.
Instantaneous switching to another power line (when the

power of an operating motor is cut off or power failure
occurs) creates a large phase difference between the line
voltage and the voltage remaining in the motor, which may
cause electrical or mechanical failure. To rapidly switch
power lines, store the remaining voltage attenuation time
to wait for the voltage remaining in the motor to attenuate.
This function operates at restart after a momentary power
failure.
The energy-saving operation automatically stops during

acceleration and deceleration or when the torque limiting
function is activated.
If the momentary power failure time is shorter than the

wait time value, a restart occurs following the wait time. If
the power failure time is longer than the wait time value, a
restart occurs when the drive is ready to operate (after
about 0.2 to 0.5 seconds).
H11 DEC mode
H14 Auto-restart (freq. fall rate)
H 1 1 D E C
H 1 4 F A L L
MO D E
Set value
0: Deceleration-to-stop based on data

set with H07 Non-linear acceleration
and deceleration
1: Coasting-to-stop
This function determines the drive stopping method when
a STOP command is entered.
Note:
This function is effective only when a STOP command is
entered and, therefore, is ineffective if the motor is
stopped by lowering the set frequency.
H12 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting

H 1 2 I N S T
Set value 0: Inactive
C L
1: Active
R A T E
Setting range: 0.00, 0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s

If H14 = 0.00, the frequency is reduced according to the
set deceleration time.
This function determines the reduction rate of the output
frequency for synchronizing the drive output frequency
with the motor speed. This function is also used to
reduce the frequency and thereby prevent stalling under a
heavy load during normal operation.
Note:
A frequency reduction rate that is set too large may
temporarily increase the regeneration energy from the load
and invoke the overvoltage protective function. Conversely, a rate that is too small extends the operation time
of the current limiting function and may invoke the drive
overload protective function.
An overcurrent trip generally occurs when current flows

above the drive protective level, following a rapid change
in motor load. The instantaneous overcurrent limiting
function controls drive output and prohibits the flow of a
current exceeding the protective level, even if the load
changes.
H15 Auto-restart (holding DC voltage)
Since the operation level of the instantaneous overcurrent

limiting function cannot be adjusted, the torque limiting
function must be used.
This function is used when F14 Restart after momentary

power failure (operation selection) is set to 2 (deceleration-to-stop at power failure) or 3 (operation continuation).
Either function starts a control operation if the main circuit
DC voltage drops below the set operation continuation
level.
Motor generation torque may be reduced when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is applied. Set this function to
be inactive for equipment such as elevators, which are
adversely affected by reduced motor generation torque, in
which case an overcurrent trip occurs when the current
flow exceeds the drive protective level. A mechanical
brake should be used to ensure safety.
5-36
H 1 5 H O L D
Setting range
230V series: 200 to 300V

460 V series: 400 to 600V
If power supply voltage to the drive is high, control can be

stabilized even under an excessive load by raising the
operation continuation level. However, if the level is too
high, this function activates during normal operation and
causes unexpected motion. Please contact GE Fuji
before changing the factory default value.
H16 Auto-restart (OPR command selfhold time)

H 1 6 S E L F H O L D
Setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 seconds, 999

Since the power to an external operation circuit (relay
sequence) and the main power to the drive is generally cut
off at a power failure, the operation command issued to
the drive is also cut off. This function sets the time an
operation command is to be held in the drive. If a power
failure lasts beyond the self-hold time, power-off is
assumed, automatic restart mode is released, and the
drive starts operation at normal mode when power is
applied again. (This time can be considered to be the
allowable power failure time.)
If H16 = 999, an operation command will be held until
control power in the drive is established or until the main
circuit DC voltage is about 0.
The torque command value is +200% when the voltage at

Terminal 12 is +10V and is -200% when the voltage is 10V.
Under torque control, the torque command value and
motor load determine the speed and direction of rotation.
When the torque is controlled, the upper frequency limit
refers to the lowest value among the maximum frequency,
the frequency limiter (upper limiter), and 120 Hz. Maintain
the frequency at min. 1/10 of the base frequency because
torque control performance deteriorates at lower frequencies.
If the operation command goes off during a torque control
operation, the operation is switched to speed control and
the motor decelerates-to-stop. At this time, the torque
control function will not operate.
H19 Active drive
H18 Torque control
H 1 9 A U T
H 1 8 T RQ
Set value
C T R L
This function controls motor torque according to a

command value.
Value
0
1
Operation
[Related Functions: E01 E09 = 23]
Inactive (operation by frequency command)
Torque control active
A 0 to +10 V analog voltage input to Terminal 12 and
the direction of rotation (FWD or REV) are used for
the torque command value. 0 is used for 0 to -10V.
Torque control active
A -10 to +10V analog voltage input to Terminal 12 and
the direction of rotation (FWD or REV) are used for
the torque command value.
R E D
0: Inactive
1: Active
This function automatically extends accelerating time by

60 seconds or longer to prevent an inverter trip resulting
from a temperature rise in the inverter due to overcurrent.
(If the active drive function is activated, the acceleration
time will be three times the selected time.)
H20 PID control (mode select)

H 2 0 P I D
Set value
MO D E
0: No operation
1: Normal operation
2: Inverse operation
PID control detects the amount of feedback from a sensor

and compares it with the target value (e.g., reference
temperature). If the values differ, this function produces
an output to eliminate the deviation. In other words, this
control matches the feedback amount with the target
value.
This function can be used for flow control, pressure
control, temperature control, and other process controls.
Forward or reverse operations can be selected for PID

controller output. This enables motor revolutions to be
faster or slower according to PID controller output.
5-37
The target value can be entered using F01, Frequency

setting 1, or directly from the keypad panel.
For entry from F01, Frequency setting 1, input a signal to
the selected terminal. For direct entry from the keypad
panel, turn on keypad operation. Select any of the digital
Terminals X1 (E01) to X9 (E09) and assign a value of 11
(frequency setting switching).
Only positive values can be input for this feedback

amount of PID control. Negative values (e.g., 0 to -10V, 10 to 0V) cannot be input, thereby the function cannot be
used for a reverse operation by an analog signal.
Feedback signal setting (H21) must be different from the
type of setpoint value.
NOTE: For the target value and feedback amount, the

process amount can be displayed according to the values
set in E40 Display coefficient A, and E41 Display coefficient B.
H21 PID control (feedback signal)

H 2 1 F B
S I G N A L
This function selects the terminal, direction of operation,

and feedback input. Select a value from the table below
according to sensor specifications.
Value
0
1
2
3
Description
Terminal 12, forward operation, 0 to 10V voltage input
Terminal C1, forward operation, 4 to 20mA current input
Terminal 12, reverse operation, 10 to 0V voltage input
Terminal C1, reverse operation, 20 to 4mA current input
5-38
H22 PID control (P-gain)

H23 PID control (I-gain)
H24 PID control (D-gain)
These functions are not generally used alone but are
combined like P control, PI control, PD control, and PID
control.
P operation
An operation using an output frequency proportional to
deviation is called P operation, which outputs an
operation amount proportional to deviation, though it
cannot eliminate deviation alone.
I operation
An operation where the change speed of the output
frequency is proportional to the deviation is called an I
operation. An I operation outputs an operation amount as
the integral of deviation and, therefore, has the effect of
matching the feedback control amount to the target value
(e.g., set frequency), though it deteriorates response for
significant changes in deviation.
H 2 2 P G A I N
Setting range: 0.01 to 10.0 times

P (gain) is the parameter that determines the response
level for the deviation of P operation. Although an
increase in gain speeds up response, an excessive gain
causes vibration, and a decrease in gain delays response.
5-39
PID control
PID control combines the P operation, the I operation
which removes deviation, and the D operation which
suppresses vibration. This control achieves deviationfree, accurate, and stable responses.
H 2 3 I G A I N
Setting range: 0.0 (Inactive), 0.1 to 3600 seconds

H23 I-gain is used as a parameter to determine the
effect of I operation. A longer integration time delays
response and weakens resistance to external elements.
A shorter integration time speeds up response, but an
integration time that is too short causes vibration.
Adjusting PID value

Adjust the PID value while monitoring the response
waveform on an oscilloscope or other instrument, if
possible. Proceed as follows:
D operation
An operation where the output frequency is proportional
to the deviation differential is called a D operation. It
outputs an operation amount as the deviation differential
and, therefore, is capable of responding to sudden
changes.
Increase the value of H22 P-gain without generating

vibration.
Decrease the value of H23 I-gain without generating
vibration.
Increase the value of H24 D-gain without generating
vibration.
Adjust the response waveform as follows:
To remove the overshoot, increase the value of H23 I-gain,
then decrease the value of H24 D-gain.
H 2 4 D G A I N
Setting range: 0.00 (Inactive), 0.01 to 10.0 seconds

H24 D-gain is used as a parameter to determine the
effect of a D operation. A longer differentiation time
causes vibration by P operation quickly attenuating at
the occurrence of deviation. Excessive differentiation
time could cause vibration. Shortening the differentiation time reduces attenuation at the occurrence of
deviation.
To stabilize response quickly, allowing for min. overshoot,

: decrease the value of H23 I-gain or increase the value of
H24 D-gain.
PI control
P operation alone does not remove deviation completely.
P + I control (where I operation is added to P operation)
is normally used to remove the remaining deviation. PI
control always operates to eliminate deviation, even
when the target value is changed or there is a constant
disturbance. When I operation is strengthened, however,
the response for rapidly changing deviation deteriorates.
P operation can also be used individually for loads
containing an integral element.
To suppress vibration with a period longer than the value

of H23 I-gain, increase the value of H23.
PD control
If deviation occurs under PD control, an output frequency larger than that of D operation alone occurs
rapidly and prevents the deviation from expanding. For
a small deviation, P operation is restricted. When the
load contains an integral element, P operation alone may
allow responses to vibrate due to the effect of the
integral element, in which case PD control is used to
attenuate the vibration of P operation and stabilize
responses. In other words, this control is applied to
loads in processes without a braking function.
5-40
To suppress vibration with a frequency roughly equivalent

to the value H24 D-gain, decrease the value of H24. If
there is residual vibration with 0.0, decrease the value of
H22 P-gain.
H25 PID control (Feedback filter)

H 2 5 F B
F I L T E R
The figure above for H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)

shows that a 250W resistor and the thermistor (resistance
value Rp) are connected in parallel. Hence, voltage Vc1 at
Terminal C1 can be calculated using the following formula:

This filter is for feedback signal input from Terminals 12 or
C1. This filter stabilizes operation of the PID control
system. A set value that is too large, however, deteriorates response.
H26 PTC thermistor (mode select)

H 2 6 P T C
Set value
MO D E
0: Inactive
1: Active
250 Rp
250 + Rp
Vc1
X 10 [V]
250 Rp
1000+
250 + Rp
The operation level can be set by bringing Rp in the Vc1
calculation formula into the following range.
Rp1 < Rp < Rp2
To calculate Rp, use the following formula:
Set this function active when the motor has a PTC

thermistor for overheat protection
Connect the PTC thermistor as shown in the figure below.
Turn on switch PTC on the control PCB. The trip mode is
activated by OH2: External thermal relay tripped.
Rp
Rp1 + Rp2
[Ohm]
2
H28 Droop operation

H 2 8 D RO OP
Set value : -9.9Hz to 0.0Hz

When two or more drive motors operate a single machine,
a higher load is placed on the motor that is rotating the
fastest. Droop operation achieves a good load balance by
applying drooping characteristics to speed against load
variations.
Calculate the droop amount using the following formula:
Note: Must be 0 setting when using 4-20mA reference or
feedback signal and the PTC switch is off.
Droop amount = Base frequency X
H27 PTC thermistor (level select)

H 2 7 P T C
Speed droop at rated torque [r/min.]

Synchronous speed [r/min.]
L E V E L
Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00V

The voltage input to Terminal C1 is compared to the set
voltage level. If the input voltage is equal to or greater
than the set voltage, H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)
starts.
The PTC thermistor has its own alarm temperature. The
internal resistance value of the thermistor largely changes
at the alarm temperature. The operation voltage level is
set using this change in the resistance value.
5-41
[Hz]
H30 Serial link (Function select)

H 3 0 L I N K
Value
0
F U N C
Processing at Communication Error

Immediate Er 8 trip (forced stop)
Continue operation within timer time, Er 8 trip after
time expires
2
3
Continue operation and retry within timer time, then

invoke an Er 8 trip if a communication error occurs.
If an error does not occur, continue operation.
Continue operation.
The link function (communication) provides a standard

RS485 serial interface and optional fieldbus connections.
The serial link function includes:
1)
2)
3)
Monitoring (data monitoring, function data check)

Frequency setting
Operation command (FWD, REV, and other commands for digital input)
4) Write function data
Communication can be enabled and disabled by a digital
input. This function sets the serial link function when
communication is enabled.
Value
0
1
2
3
Frequency
Command
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Operation
Command
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
H 3 3 T I M E R
Setting range: 0 to 60.0 sec.

This function sets the error processing timer value.
H 3 4 B AU D
R A T E
This function sets the baud rate.
The data monitoring and write functions are always

enabled. Disabling communication by a digital input
produces the same results as if this function were set to 0.
If the bus option is installed, this setting selects the bus
function, and the RS485 interface is restricted to monitoring and writing function data. If the bus option is not
installed, this setting selects the RS485 function.
Value
Baud Rate
19200 bits/s
9600 bits/s
4800 bits/s
2400 bits/s
H 3 5 L E N G T H
This function sets data length.
H31 RS485 (Address)

H39 RS485 (Response interval)
Value
0
These functions set the conditions for RS485 RTU serial

communication. Set the conditions according to the host
device.
Data Length
8 bit
.
H 3 6 P AR I T Y
H 3 1 A D D R E S S
This function sets the parity bit
Value
This function sets the station address of RTU.

Maximum connected devices is 31 for an RS-485 network.
H 3 2 MOD E
O N
E R
Parity Bit
None
Even
Odd
These functions configure the drive behavior in the event

of a communication error.
H 3 7 S T O P
B I T S
This function sets the stop bit

Value
Stop Bit
2 bits
1 bit
The stop bit is automatically configured by the value of the

parity bit. For parity NONE the stop bit is 2 bits. For
parity EVEN or ODD the stop bit is 1 bit.
5-42
H 3 8 N O
R E S
Setting range:
0 (no detection)
1 to 60 seconds
In a system where the drive is continuously polled within a

specific time, this function detects that access was
stopped due to an open circuit or other network fault and
results in an Er 8 trip.
H 3 9 I N T E R V A L
Setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 second

This function sets the time from when a request is issued
from the host device to when a response is returned.
5-43
A: Alternative Motor Parameters ( Motor 2 )

A06 Electronic thermal relay 2 (select)
A01 Maximum frequency 2

A 0 1 M A X
A07 Electronic thermal relay 2 (level)
H z 2
A08 Electronic thermal relay 2 (Thermal time

constant)
This function sets the maximum frequency for Motor 2

output by the drive. It operates the same as F03 Maximum frequency 1. For details, see the explanation for
F03.
A 0 6 E L C T R N
O L 2
A 0 7 O L
L E V E L 2
A 0 8 T I M E
C N S T 2
A02 Base frequency 2

A 0 2 B A S E
H z 2
This function sets the maximum output frequency in the

constant torque area for Motor 2 (i.e., output frequency at
rated output voltage). It operates the same as F04 Base
frequency 1. For details, see the explanation for F04.
V 2
This function sets the rated voltage output to Motor 2. It

operates the same as F05 Rated voltage 1. For details,
see the explanation for F05.
V 2
This function sets the maximum drive output voltage for

Motor 2. It operates the same as F06 Maximum voltage 1.
For details, see the explanation for F06.
A10 Number of motor-2 poles

PO L E S
This function sets the number of poles to be driven by

Motor 2. It operates the same as P01 Number of Motor 1
poles. For details, see the explanation for P01.
A11 Motor 2 (capacity)

A 1 1 M 2 CA P
A05 Torque boost 2

A 0 5 T RQ
This function sets the torque vector function for Motor 2.

It operates the same as F42 Torque vector control 1. For
details, see the explanation for F42.
A 1 0 M 2
A04 Maximum Voltage 2

A 0 4 M A X
A09 Torque vector control 2

A 0 9 T RQ V E C T O R 2
A03 Rated Voltage 2

A 0 3 R A T E D
These functions set the function of the electronic thermal

overload relay for Motor 2. They operate the same as F10
to F12 Electronic thermal overload relay 1. For details,
see the explanations for F10 to F12.
B OO S T 2
This function sets the torque boost function for Motor 2. It

operates the same as F09 Torque boost 1. For details,
see the explanation for F09.
This function sets the capacity of Motor 2. It operates the

same as P02 Motor 1 (Capacity). For details, see the
explanation for P02. However, the related motor data
functions change to A12 Motor 2 (Rated current), A15
Motor 2 (No-load current), A16 Motor 2 (%R1 setting), and
A17 Motor 2 (%X setting).
A12 Motor 2 (Rated current)

A 1 2 M 2 L R
This function sets the rated current for Motor 2. It

operates the same as P03 Motor 1 (Rated current). For
details, see the explanation for P03.
5-44
A13 Motor 2 (Tuning)

A 1 3 M 2
T U N 1
This function sets online tuning for Motor 2. It operates

the same as for P04 Motor 1 (Tuning). For details, see the
explanation for P04.
A14 Motor 2 (On-line tuning)

A 1 4 M 2
T U N 2
This function sets online tuning for Motor 2. It operates

the same as P05 Motor 1 (On-line tuning). For details, see
the explanation for P05.
A15 Motor 2 (No-load current)

A 1 5 M 2
I O
This function sets the no-load current for Motor 2. It

operates the same as P06 Motor 1 (No-load current). For
details, see the explanation for P06.
A16 Motor 2 (%R1 setting)

A17 Motor 2 (%X setting)
A 1 6 M 2 %R 1
A 1 7 M 2 %X
These functions set %R1 and %X for Motor 2. It operates

the same as P07 Motor 1 (%R1 setting) and P08 Motor 1
(%X setting). For details, see the explanations for P07 and
P08.
A18 Slip compensation control 2

A 1 8 S L I P
C OM P 2
This function sets the amount of slip compensation for

Motor 2. It operates the same as P09 Slip compensation
control. For details, see the explanation for P09.
5-45
Notes
5-46
6. Protective Operations
6.1 List of Protective Functions
In the event of an abnormality in the inverters operation, the protective function will activate immediately to trip the
inverter and display the alarm name on the LED monitor while the motor coasts to a stop. A list of the alarms with their
explanations is included in the table below, and troubleshooting charts in Section 7.
Table 6.1.1 List of Alarms and Causes
Keypad Panel Display
Alarm Name
LED
LCD
OC1
OC DURING ACC
OC2
OC DURING DEC
Overcurrent
OC3
OC AT SET SPD
Ground fault
Cause of Activation
During acceleration
If the inverter output current momentarily exceeds the overcurrent detection
During deceleration
level, due to an overcurrent in the motor, or a short-circuit or ground fault in the
Running at constant output circuit, the protective function is activated during heavy load.
speed
If a ground fault in the inverter output circuit is detected, the protective function is activated (for 40 Hp
or more only). If a ground fault occurs in an inverter rated at 30 Hp or less, the inverter is protected by
the overcurrent protection. If protection against personal injury or property damage is required, install
a separate ground-fault protective relay or ground leakage circuit breaker.
EF
GROUND FAULT
OU1
OV DURING ACC
During acceleration
OU2
OV DURING DEC
During deceleration
OU3
OV AT SET SPD
Running at constant
speed
Undervoltage
LU
UNDERVOLTAGE
If the DC link voltage in the main circuit falls below the undervoltage detection level (230V series: 200V
DC, 460V series: 400V DC) due to a lowered power supply, the output is shut down. If function F14
Restart after momentary power failure was selected, an alarm is not displayed. In addition, if the supply
voltage falls to a level unable to maintain control power, an alarm may not be displayed.
Input phase loss
Lin
PHASE LOSS
If input power L1/R, L2/S and L3/T has any phase of the 3 phase power "OPEN" or if there is a significant
disparity between the phases, the retifying diodes or smoothing capacitors may be damaged. An Alarm
is displayed and the protective function is activated during heavy load.
Overheating of heat
sink
OH1
FIN OVERHEAT
If the temperature of the heat sink rises due to a cooling fan failure, or the temperature of the heatsink
is too low, the protective function is activated.
External alarm
OH2
EXT ALARM
Overheating
internally
OH3
HIGH AMB TEMP
Overheating of
braking resistor
dbH
DBR OVERHEAT
Motor 1 overload
OL1
MOTOR1 OL
Motor 2 overload
OL2
MOTOR2 OL
If the second motor current exceeds the preset level when the operation is switched to drive the
second motor, the protective function is activated, provided that electronic thermal O/L relay 2 of
function A04 was selected.
Inverter overload
OLU
INVERTER OL
If the output current exceeds the rated overload current, the protective function is activated to provide
thermal protection against overheating of the semiconductor elements in the inverters main circuit.
Blown fuse
FUS
DC FUSE OPEN
Memory error
Er1
MEMORY ERROR
If a memory error occurs, such as missing or invalid data, the protective function is activated.
Er2
KEYPD COM ERR
If a communication error or interrupt between the keypad panel and control circuit is detected, the
protective function is activated.
Er3
Er4
Er5
CPU ERROR
OPTN COM ERR
OPTION ERROR
Operating error
Er6
OPR PROCD ERR
Output wiring error
Er7
TUNING ERROR
Modbus RTU error
Er8
RS485 COM ERR
Overvoltage
Keypad panel
communication
error
CPU error
Option error
If the DC link voltage in the main circuit exceeds the overvoltage detection level
(230V series: 460V DC, 400V series: 800V DC), due to an increase in the
regenerating current from the motor, the output is shut down. However,
protection against inadvertent overvoltage (e.g., high-voltage line) may not be
provided
If the external alarm contacts on the braking unit, braking resistor, or external thermal O/L relay are
connected to the control circuit terminals (THR), the contacts will be actuated according to contact
signals.
If the temperature inside the inverter rises due to poor ventilation, etc., the protective function is
activated.
If electronic thermal O/L relay (for braking resistor) function F13 is selected, the protective function is
activated to prevent the resistor from burning due to overheating caused by frequent use of the braking
resistor.
The protective function is activated if the motor current exceeds the preset level, provided that
electronic thermal O/L relay 1 function F10 has been selected.
If the fuse in the inverter is blown out following a short-circuit or damage to the internal circuit, the
protective function is activated (for 40 Hp or more only).
If a CPU error occurs due to noise, etc., the protective function is activated.
Error occurred while using an optional unit.
Detects drive operating procedure error during drive startup. FWD or REV connected to terminal CM
when Main power is applied to drive (F02 setting 3 or 4). Stop key on keypad is pressed in terminal
operation (F02 setting 1 or 3). Detected timed alarm stop command.
If there is an open circuit or connection error in the inverter output wiring during an auto-tuning
procedure, the protective function is activated.
If an error occurs while using Modbus-RTU, the protective function is activated.
Note: Number in fron of Alarm Code indicates multiple alarms. See page 4-15.
6-1
6.2 Alarm Reset
10ms or more
To release the trip status, enter the reset command by

pressing the RESET key on the keypad panel or sending
the appropriate signal to the RST terminal after removing
the cause of the trip. Since the reset command is an
edge operation, input a command sequence such as
OFF-ON-OFF as shown in Fig.6-2-1.
Reset command
Keypad panel display
Alarm output
When releasing the trip status, set the operation command to OFF. If the operation command is set to ON,
inverter will start operation after resetting.
OFF
ON
OFF
Normal display
Alarm display (Operable)
OFF
ON
OFF
Trip
Fig. 6-2-1
WARNING
If the alarm reset is activated with the operation signal ON, the inverter will restart suddenly,
which may be dangerous. To ensure safety, disable the operating signal when releasing the trip status,
as accident may result.
6-2
7. Troubleshooting
7.1 Activation of Protective Function
(1) Overcurrent
Overcurrent during
acceleration OC1
YES
Remove the short-circuit

and ground fault.
Are the motor connecting terminals (U, V, W) short-circuited or grounded?

NO
NO
NO
YES
Reduce the load or increase

the drive capacity?
Is the load excessive?

NO
NO
Overcurrent running at
constant speed OC3
Overcurrent during
deceleration OC2
NO
Can the torque boost

amount be reduced?
NO
Overcurrent during
acceleration OC1
YES
YES
Reduce the torque boost.
NO
Is the acceleration time

setting too short
compared with the load?
YES
NO
Faulty drive or error due to

noise. Consult with GE Drives.
Is the deceleration time

setting too short
compared with the load?
YES
YES
NO
Has the load changed

suddenly?
YES
Can the acceleration time

setting be prolonged?
NO
YES
Prolong time settings.
Can the deceleration time

setting be prolonged?
NO
The braking method
requires inspection.
Contact GE Drives.

the drive capacity.

the drive capacity.
(2) Ground fault

Remove the grounded part.
YES
Ground fault
EF
Note:
Is a part in the drive output circuit

(cable, motor) grounded?
NO
Faulty drive or error due to noise.

Contact GE Drives.
The ground fault protective function is provided only for drive for nominal applied motors rated at
40 HP or more.
(3) Fuse brown

Fuse brown
FUS
Possible short-circuit
within the drive.
Contact GE Drives.
7-1
(4) Overvoltage
Overvoltage during
deceleration OU2
Overvoltage during
acceleration OU1
Reduce the supply

voltage to less than the
specified upper limit.
NO
Overvoltage running at
constant speed OU3
Is the power supply voltage within the specified value?

YES
YES
YES
Does OU activate when the load is suddenly removed?

NO
NO
Faulty drive or error
due to noise. Contact
GE Drives.
NO
YES
NO
Does the main circuit DC link voltage

exceed the protection level?
YES
YES
Does OU alarm activate
when acceleration is
completed?
YES
YES
Can the acceleration

time be prolonged?
NO
YES
NO
YES
Can the deceleration time be prolonged?
Prolong.
NO
Reduce.
YES
Can the amount of load inertia be reduced?
NO
NO
NO
NO
Is the braking device or DC brake function in use?

YES
YES
YES
Consider using a
braking system or DC
brake function.
Inspect the braking method. Contact GE Drives.
(5) Low voltage

Low voltage
LU
Is the power supply

voltage within the
specified value?
Has a (momentary)
power failure occurred?
Reset and restart

operation.
Faulty parts or loose

connection in the power
circuit?
Replace the faulty part and

repair the connection.
Is there a load requiring

a large starting current
within the same power
distribution group?
Does LU activate when

the circuit breaker or
magnetic contactor is
switched on?
Modify power distribution system to

satisfy the specified value.
7-2
Faulty drive control circuit

or error due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
Is the main circuit DC voltage

(between P-N) higher than the
detection level specified in
Section 6.1.1?
Is power transformer
capacity adequate?
The drive may be faulty.

Contact GE Drives.
(6) Overheating internally and overheating

of heat sink
Over temperature at
inside air OH3
(7) External thermal relay tripped

External thermal relay tripped
OH2
Overheating at
heatsink OH1
Check the temperature of the

heatsink using the alarm
information displayed on the
keypad panel.
NO
IIncrease ambient
temperature
YES
Is PTC operating?
YES
Does the heatsink
temperature indicate
50C or lower?
Is the ambient
temperature -10C or
lower?
YES
NO
Reduce the load.
Is the external circuit

(including constants
regular?
NO
NO
Set to correct value.
YES
NO
Change to regular
external circuit.
YES
Replace the cooling fan.

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
YES
Is the cooling air
passage blocked?
Incorrect motor load or

inadequate cooling.
Check the motor side.
YES
YES
NO
Is the cooling fan
rotating?
YES
NO
Is PTC level H27 set
correctly?
NO
Is PTC MODE
H26 enabled?
Remove obstacles.
NO
Is the ambient
temperature within the
specification?

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
YES
Is data input to the control

terminals THR-X1 to X9?
Are alarm signals from
external equipment input to
the terminals and the CM?
NO
Arrange peripheral
conditions to meet the
specification.
NO
Connect the alarm

signal contact.
NO
Remove the cause

of alarm function
activation.
YES
(8) Drive overload and motor overload

Drive overload
OLU
Is the alarm function of

the external equipment
operating correctly?
Motor overload
OL1, OL2
YES
Do the characteristics of the
electronic thermal O/L relay
and motor overload match?
NO
Connect a thermal O/L

relay externally.
YES
NO
Is the electronic thermal O/L

relay setting correct?
Set to the correct level.
YES
NO
YES

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
Reduce the load or

increase drive capacity.
7-3

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
(9) Memory error Er1,

Keypad panel communication error Er2,
CPU error Er3
Er1, 2, 3 indicated. Abnormal

display or indication goes out.
(10) Output wiring error
Output wiring error

Er7
Remedy faulty parts.
NO
Turn the power off then on
again after the CHARGE lamp
(CRG) goes off.
Are the connectors, plugs,

and ICs inserted correctly?
Is there noise generating
source nearby?
YES
Is data displayed on the

LED monitor correctly?
NO
Did the error occur

during tuning?
NO
Are the braking unit and
braking resistor connected
incorrectly?
YES
Connect
correctly or
replace the
cable.
NO
Drive may be faulty.

Contact GE Drives.
YES
YES
Faulty drive or error due

to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
Drive is normal.
Continue operation.
(11) Input Phase/Loss

Is the U, V, W terminal wiring not
connected or is there an open
circuit?
Input phase loss

Lin
YES
Connect
correctly or
replace the
cable.
NO
Are all main circuit power supply
terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T
connected to the power supply?
NO
Connect all three

phases.
The keypad panel

connector is loose.
YES
Secure the
connector.
NO
YES
Are there loose screws on
the terminal block?
YES
Tighten the screws on

the terminal block.
NO
Is there a significant
imbalance voltage
between phases?
Is connection between
control terminals FWD,
REV - CM enabled?
YES
Disable the
connection.
NO
YES

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
NO

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
7-4
7.2 Abnormal Motor Rotation

(1) If motor does not rotate
Charge lamp (CRG)
lights and LCD moniotr
lights up?
Motor does not rotate.
NO
YES
Remove the cause of alarm
function activation and reset
the alarm, then run the motor.
Is the LCD monitor

displaying an alarm
mode screen?
NO
YES
Keyad
panel
YES
Does the motor run if

FWD or REV is pressed?
NO
NO
Press the UP
key and set the
frequency.
NO
YES
Does the motor start
when the key UP
is pressed?
NO
Was the forward or

reverse operation
command given?
YES
YES
Has the frequency

been set?
YES
YES
Set the frequency
correctly.
Is a jumper or DC reactor
connected between terminals
P1 and P(+)?
YES
Control
terminals
NO
NO
Are the frequency limiter

(High) and the frequency
setting lower than the
starting frequency?
NO
Faulty motor.
Turn on.
NO
Connect.

Contact GE Drives.
Is external wiring between

YES
control circuit terminals FWD,
REV - CM connected correctly?
Replace the faulty

switch or relay.
NO
YES
Are the drive output

terminals (U, V, W) provided
with the proper voltage?
NO
Check for problems (low

NO voltage, an open phase,
a loose connection, poor
contact) and remedy
accordingly.
Are the voltages at the

power terminals (R/L1,
S/L2, T/L3) normal?
Is input method from

keypad panel or control
terminal?
If no error is detected,
continue operation.
YES
Are the circuit breaker and

magnetic contactor on the power
supply side switched on?
YES
Is the external wiring between

control terminals 13, 12, 11,
and C1 or between X1-X9 and
CM for the multi-step
frequency selection connected
correctly?
YES
NO
Correct the wiring error.

NO
Replace the faulty frequency

setting POT, (VR), signal converter,
switch, or relay contacts as
required.

Contact GE Drives.
YES
NO
YES
Excessive load?
Are the cables to the

motor connected
correctly?
NO
Correct the wiring error.
YES
Is the torque boost
set correctly?
YES
NO
The load is excessive, resulting in

motor lock. Reduce the load and
check that the brake is released
(if a mechanical brake is used.)
Raise the torque boost.
Note: Monitor the operation command or

frequency setting values, etc., on
the LED or LCD monitor after
selecting the respective functions.
The motor does not rotate if the following commands are issued.
An operation command is issued while the coast-to-stop or DC braking command is output.
A reverse operation command is issued with the H08 Rev. phase sequence lock value set ot 1.
7-5
(2) If the motor rotates but the speed does not change
Is the maximum
frequency setting too
low?
The motor rotates but the

speed does not change.
YES
Increase the setting.
NO
YES
Change the setting.
Is the higher or lower

frequency limiter
activating?
Set the frequency.

Keypad panel
operation
NO
YES
Pattern
operation
Is the timer timing

too long?
NO
YES
Is the pattern operation

competed?
Which frequency setting

methods used: keypad panel,
analog signal, multi-step
frequency, or UP/DOWN
control? Is the pattern
operation activated?
Analog signal
YES
Does the speed change when
the UP or DOWN is pressed?
Can the frequency

setting signal (0 to 10 V,
4 to 20 mA) be changed?
Multi-step frequency
UP/DOWN
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
Are the external connections

between X1-X9 and CM
correct?
Are all acceleration and

deceleration times
identical?
NO
Correct the connection

error.
YES
NO
Are the external

connections between
control terminals 13, 12,
11 and C1 correct?
YES
NO
Are the frequencies for

each multi-step
frequency different?
NO
Change the frequency

setting.
Replace the faulty frequency

setting POT (VR) or signal
converter as required.
YES

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
NO
Is the acceleration or
deceleration time set
too long?
YES
Change the time setting to

conform to load values.
In the following cases, changing the motor speed is also restricted.

Signals are input from control terminals both 12 and C1 when F01 Frequency command 1 and C30
Frequency command 2 are set to 3, and there is no significant change in the added value.
The load is excessive, and the torque limiting and current limiting functions are activated.
7-6
(3) If the motor stalls during acceleration
The motor stalls during

acceleration.
Is the acceleration time

too short?
YES
Prolong the time.
NO
Is the inertia moment of the YES
motor or the load excessive?
Is a special motor used?
YES
Contact GE Drives.
NO
NO
Use a thicker cable between
the drive and the motor or
shorten the cable length.
YES
Reduce the inertia moment

of the load or increase the
drive capacity.
Has the motor terminal

voltage dropped?
NO
Reduce the torque of the

load or increase the drive
capacity.
YES
Is the torque of the load

excessive?
NO
Is the torque boost

set correctly?
YES
Faulty drive or error due

to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
NO
Increase the torque boost.
The motor generates

abnormal heat.
Is the torque boost

excessive?
YES
Reduce the torque boost.
NO
Has the motor been
operating continuously at a
very low speed?
YES
Use a motor exclusive

to the drive.
YES

motor capacity.
NO

NO
Is the drive output voltage.

Terminals (U, V, W)
balanced?
YES
Faulty motor.
NO
Note: Motor overheating following a

higher frequency setting is likely the
result of the current wave form.
Contact GE Drives.

due to noise, etc.
Contact GE Drives.
7-7
Notes
7-8
8. Maintenance and Inspection

Proceed with daily inspection and periodic inspection to prevent malfunction and ensure long-term reliability. Some tips
regarding things to look for during these inspections are listed below.
8.1 Daily Inspections

During operation, a visual inspection for abnormal operation can take place externally without removing the covers.
The inspection should cover the following areas:
(1) The performance, according to standard specifications,
is as expected.
(2) The environment conforms to standard specifications.
(3) The keypad panel display is normal.
(4) There are no abnormal sounds, vibrations, or odors.
(5) There are no indications of overheating or discoloration.
8.2 Periodic Inspections

Periodic inspections should be made after stopping operations, cutting off the power source, and removing the surface
cover.
Note that after turning off the power, the smoothing capacitors in the DC section of the main circuit take time to discharge. To prevent electric shock, confirm with a multimeter that the voltage has dropped below the safety value (25 V
DC or below) after the charge lamp (CRG) goes off.
WARNING
Start the inspection at least five minutes after turning off the power supply for inverters rated at 30
Hp or less. Wait at least ten minutes for inverters rated at 40 Hp or more. Check that the charge
lamp (CRG) went off and that the voltage is 25V DC or less between terminals P(+) and N(-). Electric
shock may result.
Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance and component replacement operations.
Remove metal jewelry such as watches and rings, and always use insulated tools.
Never modify the drive. Electric shock or injury may result.
8-1
Area to Check
Items to Check
How to inspect
Evaluation Criteria
Environment
1) Check the ambient temperature, humidity,

vibration, atmosphere (dust, gas, oil mist,
water drops).
2) Is the area surrounding the equipment free of
foreign objects.
1) Conduct a visual inspection and use

appropriate meters.
2) Visual inspection
1) Results comply with all

standard specifications.
2) The area is clear.
Voltage
Are the voltages in the main circuit and the

control circuit normal?
Measure with a multi-meter.
Results comply with all

standard specifications.
Keypad panel
1) Is the display hard to read?

2) Are the characters complete?
1), 2) The display can be

easily read and characters
are normal.
Structure
(frame or cover)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Is there abnormal sound or vibration?

Are nuts or bolts loose?
Is there deformation or damage?
Is there discoloration as a result of overheating?
5) Are there stains or dust?
1) Visual and aural inspection

2) Tighten
3), 4), 5) Visual inspection
1), 2), 3), 4), 5)

No abnormalities
Common
1) Are there loose or missing nuts or bolts?

2) Are there deformations, cracks, damage, or
discoloration due to overheating or deterioration in the equipment and insulation?
3) Are there stains and dust?
1) Tighten.
2), 3) Visual inspection
1), 2), 3) No abnormalities

Note: Discolorationof the
bus bar does not
indicate a problem.
Conductors
and wiring
1) Is there discoloration or distortion of a

conductor due to overheating?
2) Are there cracks, crazing or discoloration of
the cable sheath?
1), 2) No abnormalities
Visual inspection
No abnormalities
Cooling System
Control Circuit
Main Circuit
Terminal block Is there damage?

Smoothing
capacitor
1) Is there electrolyte leakage, discoloration,

crazing, or swelling in the case?
2) Is the safety valve not protruding, or are
valves protruding too far?
3) Measure the capacitance if necessary.

3) *Estimate life expectancy from
maintenance information and from
measurements using capacitance
measuring equipment.
3) Capacitance is within
85% of initial value
Resistor
1) Is there any unusual odor or damage to the

insulation by overheating?
2) Is there an open circuit?
1) Visual and olfactory inspection

2) Conduct a visual inspection or use a
multi-meter by removing the connection
on one side.
1) No abnormalities
2) Less than about 10%
of the indicated
resistance value
Transformer
and reactor
Is there abnormal buzzing or an unpleasant

smell?
Aural, olfactory, and visual inspection
No abnormalities
Magnetic
conductor
and relay
1) Is there a rattling noise during operation?

2) Are the contacts rough?
1) Aural inspection.
2) Visual inpection.
Control PC
board and
connector
1) Are there any loose screws or connectors?

2) Is there an unusual odor or discoloration?
3) Are there cracks, damage, deformation, or
excessive rust?
4) Is there electrolyte leakage or damage to the
capacitor?
1)
2)
3)
4)
1), 2), 3), 4)

No abnormalities
Cooling fan
1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration?

2) Are nuts or bolts loose?
3) Is there discoloration due to overheating?
1) Aural and visual inspection. Turn

manually (confirm the poewr is off).
2) Tighten.
4) *Estimate life expectancy by maintenance information
1) The fan must rotate

smoothly.
Ventilation
Is there foreign matter on the heat sink or intake

and exhaust ports?
Visual inspection
No abnormalities
See additional notes on following page.
8-2
Aural inspection.
Visual and olfactory inspection
Visual inspection
*Estimate life expectancy by visual
inspection and maintenace information
Note: If equipment is stained, wipe with a clean cloth. Use a vacuum to remove dust. *Estimate of life expectancy based
on maintenance information.
The maintenance information is stored in the drive keypad panel. It indicates the electrostatic capacitance of the main
circuit capacitors and the life expectancy of the electrolytic capacitors on the control PC board and the cooling fans. Use
this data as the basis to estimate the life expectancy of parts.
1) Determining the capacitance of the main circuit capacitors
This drive is equipped with a function to automatically indicate the capacitance of the capacitors installed in the main
circuit when powering up the drive after disconnecting the power according to the prescribed conditions.
The initial capacitance values are set in the drive when shipped from the factory, and the decrease ratio (%) to those
values can be displayed.
Use this function as follows:
(1) Remove any option boards from the inverter. Disconnect the DC bus connections to the main circuit [Terminals
P(+) and N(-)] from the braking unit or other inverters, if connected. The power factor correcting reactor (DC
reactor) does not need be disconnected.
A power supply introduced to the auxiliary input [Terminals R0, T0] that provides control power should
be isolated.
(2) Disable all the digital inputs (FWD, REV, X1-X9) on the control terminals. Also disconnect RS485 serial
communication, if used.
Turn on the main power supply. Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and that the inverter is not operating.
(There is no problem if the OH2 External thermal relay tripped function is activated by the digital input terminal.)
(3) Turn the main power off.
(4) Turn on the main power again after verifying that the charge lamp is completely off.
(5) Open the maintenance information on the keypad panel and confirm the capacitance values of the
built-in capacitors.
2) Life expectancy of the PC control board
The actual capacitance of a capacitor is not measured in this case. However, the integrated operating hours for the
control power supply, multiplied by the life expectancy coefficient as defined by the temperature inside the inverter,
will be displayed. Hence, the hours displayed may not agree with the actual operating hours, depending on the
operational environment.
Since the integrated hours are counted in unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.
3) Life expectancy of cooling fan
The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are displayed. Since the integrated hours are counted in unit hours,
power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.
The displayed value should be considered a rough estimate because the actual life of a cooling fan is influenced
significantly by the temperature.
Table 8..-2 Rough estimate of life expectancy using maintenance information
Parts
Recommended Level
Capacitor in main circuit
85% or less of the initial value
Electrolytic capacitor on control PC board
61,000 hours
Cooling fan
40,000 hours (5 Hp or less), 25,000 hours (Over 7.5 Hp)*
* Estimated life expectancy of a ventilation-fan at inverter ambient temperature of 40C
8-3
8.3 Main Circuit Measurements

The indicated values depend on the type of meter, because the harmonic component is included in the voltage and
current of the main circuit power (input) and the output (motor) side of the inverter. If measuring with a meter for commercial power frequency use, use the meters shown in Table 8.3.1.
The power factor cannot be measured using power factor meters currently available on the market, which measure the
phase difference between voltage and current. If power factors must be measured, measure the power, voltage, and
current on the input side and output side, then calculate the power factor using the following formula:
Power factor =
Power [W]
3 x Voltage [V] x Current [A]
x 100 [%]
Table 8.3-. Meters for Measuring Main Circuit
Item
Input (power supply) Side
Voltage
Meter name
Meter type
Ammeter
AR,S,T
Output (motor) Side
Current
Voltmeter Powermeter
VR,S,T
WR,S,T
Voltage
Ammeter
AU,V,W
Moving iron Rectifier or

Digital
Moving iron
type
moving-iron power meter
type
type
DC Link Circuit
Voltage
P(+) - N(-)
Current
Voltmeter
VU,V,W
Powermeter
WU,V,W
DC Voltmeter
V
Rectifier
type
Digital power
meter
Moving coil type
Symbol
Note: If the output voltage is measured with a rectifier type meter, an error may occur. Use a digital AC power meter to
ensure accuracy.
8-4
8.4 Insulation Test

Avoid megger testing on an drive since an insulation test was completed at the factory. If a megger test must be completed, proceed as described below. Incorrect testing methods may result in product damage.
If the specifications for the dielectric strength test are not followed, the drive may be damaged.
(1) Megger test for the main circuit

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use a 500V DC megger and isolate the main power before starting measurement.
If the test voltage is connected to the control circuit, remove all connection cables to the control circuit.
Connect the main circuit terminals using common cables, as shown in Fig. 8-4-1.
Perform the megger test only between the common cables connected to the main circuit and ground
(Terminal
).
A megger indicating 5M Ohm or more is normal. (This is the value measured with only the drive connected.)
(2) Insulation test in the control circuit

Megger and dielectric strength tests are not performed on the control circuit. Use a resistance multimeter with a high
resistance range to check the control circuit.
1. Remove all external cables from the control circuit terminals.
2. Conduct a continuity test between grounds. A result of 1M Ohm or more is normal.
(3) Exterior main circuit and sequence control circuit
Remove all cables from drive terminals to ensure that test voltage is not applied to the drive.
8.5 Replacement Parts

The life expectancy of a part depends on the type of part, the environment, and operating conditions. Parts should be
replaced as shown in Table 8-5-1.
Table 8-5-1 Part replacement
Part name
Standard period for

replacement
Cooling fan
3 years
Exchange for a new part
Smoothing capacitor
5 years
Exchange for a new part (determine after checking
Electrlytic capacitor on the PC board
7 years
Exchange for a new PC board (determine after checking)
Fuse
10 years
Exchange for a new part
Determine after checking
Other parts
Comments
8-5
Notes:
8-6
9. Warranty Parts and Service

The purpose of this section is to provide specific
instructions to the user of the standard drive referenced
in this book regarding warranty administration and how
to obtain assistance on both in-warranty and out-ofwarranty equipment.
WARRANTY COVERAGE
The warranty covers all major parts of the drive such as
the main printed circuit boards, transistor modules, etc.
The warranty does not cover replacement of fuses or of
the entire drive.
For all warranty procedures, refer to section 10 of this

instruction manual to identify the part or assembly.
Warranty period is 12 months after installation or 18

months after shipment from the Company, whichever
occurs first.
If assistance is required to determine warranty status,

identify defective parts, or obtain the name of your local
distributor, call:
However, the guarantee will not apply in the following

cases, even if the guarantee term has not expired:
1.

Product Service Engineering
41 Woodford Avenue
Plainville, CT USA
Phone: 1 800 533 5885 (United States)
+ 1 540 378 3280 (International)
Fax:
+ 1 540 387 8606 (All)
(+ indicates the international access code required
when calling from outside of the USA.)
2.
3.
4.
Damage was caused by incorrect use or inappropriate repair or modification.

The product was used in an environment outside the
standard specified range.
Damage was caused by dropping the product after
purchase or occurred during transportation.
Damage was caused by an earthquake, fire, flooding,
lightning, abnormal voltage, or other natural calamities and secondary disasters.
Before calling the number at left to determine warranty

status, the drive serial number will be required. This is
located on the drive nameplate. If the drive is still under
warranty, further information will be required per the InWarranty Failure Checklist shown on page 9-2 of this
instruction manual.
OUT-OF WARRANTY PROCEDURES
When the defective part has been identified, contact your
local authorized GE standard drives distributor to order
replacement parts.
MOTORS
Motor repairs on General Electric motors are generally
handled by GE Authorized Electric Motor Servicenters or
GE Apparatus Service Shops. For specific instructions on
your motor, call the distributor from which it was purchased and be prepared to furnish complete nameplate
data.
9-1
IN-WARRANTY FAILURE CHECKLIST

To assist with warranty troubleshooting, the following information is required. This data is needed to evaluate the
cause in an effort to eliminate any further failures.
Model No.: ______________________________________________________________________
Serial No.: ______________________________________________________________________
Start-Up Date: __________________________________________________________________
Failure Date: ____________________________________________________________________
Status When Failure Occurred (check one):
Power-Up __________ Running ___________ Accel ___________ Decel _________
Explanation of Failure ____________________________________________________________
Application Information (check Yes or No)
Input Transformer:
Yes ___________ No _______________
If Yes:
KVA ___________________________________
L1 Volts ___________ L2 Volts ________ L3 Volts ______________
Power Factor Correction Capacitors:
Yes __________ No _______________
If Yes: Microfarrad ______________________________
Other Equipment on Same Power
Yes __________ No _______________
If Yes, what?
Line Reactor on Input
Yes __________ No _______________
Input Starter
Yes __________ No _______________
Output Starter
Yes __________ No _______________
Motor Overloads
Yes __________ No _______________
Function Codes Different From Factory Settings

Function Code
Setting
X9
X8
SD
X7
DX
X6
DX
X5
P24
X4
P24
X3
Function Code
REV
X2
FWD
CM
CM
X1
PLC
FMP
V2
FMA
13
C1
12
Y1
11
Y3
Y2
CMY
Y4
Y5A
Y5C
30B
30C
30A
Control Terminals Used (circle if used)
Setting
Failure Message (see Section 4)

Latest Fault _______________ Previous Faults:
No Message _____________
Hz ______________________
1. _____________________________
A _______________________
2. _____________________________
V _______________________
3. _____________________________
After all of the Checklist information is acquired, contact the following number for assistance: (540) 387-5739 or (800) 533-5885
When returning failed parts, reference the C_ _ _ _ # on the shipping documents that came with the replacement parts and ship
failed parts to: GE Drives.
(Marked C _ _ _ _ #)
9-2
10. Replacement Parts

Catalog No.
Rating
Drive HP & Quantity per drive

1/4 1/2
1
2
3
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
AF-300 G11 230 VAC, 30 Hp and Below

Main Control Card
G11CPCBB1
1
1
1
1
1
Gate Driver & Power Supply Card
G11PPCBG2002
1
G11PPCBG2004
1
G11PPCBG2008
1
G11PPCBG2015
1
G11PPCBG2022
1
G11PPCBG2037
G11PPCBG2055
G11PPCBG2075
G11PPCBG2110
G11PPCBG2150
G11PPCBG2185
G11PPCBG2220
KEYPAD PANEL (Only one type per drive)
TPAG11S
NEMA 1
1
1
1
1
1
TPAG11S4
NEMA 4, 12
1
1
1
1
1
DC CAPACITOR
*
*
*
G11CAP01
PCB
1
G11CAP02
PCB
1
G11CAP03
PCB
G11CAP09
2700F
G11CAP10
3900F
G11CAP11
4700F
G11CAP12
5400F
* Located on Gate drive & Power supply Card
FAN
G11FAN01
1
1
G11FAN02
POWER MODULE
*
*
*
PS11046
30A 600V
1
1
PS11047
50A 600V
6MBP75RS060
75A 600V
6MBP100RS060
100A 600V
6MBP150RS060
150A 600V
6MBP200RS060
200A 600V
RECTIFIER MODULE
*
*
*
*
*
PVC758
75A 800V
CLK120AA80
120A 800V
CLK180AA80
180A 800V
CHARGE RESISTOR
*
*
*
*
*
30W66
30W 6.6WJ
80W25
80W 2.5WJ
FRONT COVER
G11UPCG008
1
1
1
G11UPCG040
1
1
G11UPCG075
G11UPCG220
INTERNAL DB RESISTOR
G11DBR0082
100W 40W
1
1
1
G11DBR0372
40W 80W
1
1
G11DBR0752
24W 90W
10-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
*
1
1
1
*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Catalog No.
Rating

40
50
60
75
100
125
AF-300 G11 230 VAC, 40 Hp and Above

Main Control Card
EP4113B1

EP3956C1
EP3956C2
EP3956C3
EP3957C1
EP3957C2
1
1
1
1
KEYPAD PANEL
TPAG11S4
DC CAPACITOR
LNT2G302MSMAFF
HCGHA2G362N3K
HCGHA2G452NE3K
HCGHA2G592N3K
1
400V 3000F
400V 3600F
400V 4500F
400V 5900f
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
IGBT MODULE
2MBi300NB060
CM400DU12H206
2MBi300NB06001
PD1008AC
3
3
3
6
6
6
9
9
9
12
9
80W 7.5ohm
AC220VAUX2B
AC220VAUX2B
AC220VAUX2B
AC200-240V
1
2
RECTIFIER MODULE
PD1008AC
DC CONTACTOR
FC3UL
FC1UL
FC4UL
SC7NUL
FAN
FBA09A24H1B0
(Standard)
4715PS22TB30
2750MTP15
6250MG1
(For NEMA12 Heatsink)
UHS4556MLOT1
2750MTP15OT1
U6250MKG1LTPOT1
CHARGE RESISTOR
HF5C5504
2
1
DC FUSE
CR2L260UL
CR2L400UL
A50P6004
1
1
INPUT MODULE CARD

EP3985C1
EP3985C3
10-2
1
1
Catalog No.
Rating

1/2
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
AF-300 G11 460 VAC, 30 Hp and Below

Main Control Card
G11CPCBB1
1
1
1
1
G11PPCBG4004
1
G11PPCBG4008
1
G11PPCBG4015
1
G11PPCBG4022
1
G11PPCBG4037
G11PPCBG4055
G11PPCBG4075
G11PPCBG4110
G11PPCBG4150
G11PPCBG4185
G11PPCBG4220
KEYPAD PANEL (Only one type per drive)
TPAG11S
NEMA1
1
1
1
1
TPAG11S4
NEMA Type4
1
1
1
1
DC CAPACITOR
*
*
G11CAP04
PCB
1
G11CAP05
PCB
1
G11CAP06
PCB
G11CAP07
1500F
G11CAP08
2000F
G11CAP09
2700F
G11CAP10
3900F
G11CAP11
4700F
G11CAP12
5400F
FAN
G11FAN01
1
1
G11FAN02
POWER MODULE
*
*
PS12046
15A 1200V
1
1
PS12047
25A 1200V
6MBP50RS120
50A 1200V
6MBP75RS120
75A 1200V
6MBP100RS120
100A 1200V
RECTIFIER MODULE
*
*
*
*
PVC75-16
75A 1600V
CLK70AA160
70A 1600V
CLK100AA160
100A 1600V
CHARGE RESISTOR
*
*
*
*
30W200
30W 20WJ
80W100
80W 10WJ
FRONT COVER
G11UPCG008
1
1
G11UPCG040
1
1
G11UPCG075
G11UPCG220
INTERNAL DB RESISTOR
G11DBR0044
720W 30W
1
G11DBR0084
470W 40W
1
G11DBR0374
200W 80W
1
1
G11DBR0754
100W 90W
10-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
*
1
1
1
*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Catalog No.
Rating

40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

Main Control Card
EP4113B1

EP3959C1
EP3959C2
EP3959C3
EP3959C4
EP3959C5
EP3957C3
EP3957C4
EP3957C5
DC CAPACITOR
LNT2G302MSMAFF
HCGHA2G362N3K
HCGHA2G452NE3K
HCGHA2G592N3K
HCGHA2G742N3K
HCGHA2G932N3K
FAN
FBA09A24H1B0
MRS18-DUL
THB1-UHS4556M
(Standard)
4715PS22TB30
2750MTP15
6250MG1
(For NEMA12 Heatsink)
UHS4556MLOT1
2750MTP15OT1
U6250MKG1LTPOT1
IGBT MODULE
2MBi150PC14002
CM200DU24H203
2MBi300P14002
CM200DU24H202
2MBi300P14003
20
20
26
26
4
3
4
3
4
4
4
4
18
18
24
24
1
1
1
400V 3000F
400V 3600F
400V 4500F
400V 5900F
400V 7400F
400V 9300F
Gate Drive Amplifier Card

EP4142
KEYPAD PANEL
TPAG11S4
4
4
4
6
12
8
12
2
2
3
2
3
3
12
12
2
2
3
3
3
3
6
6
10-4
Catalog No.
Rating

40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

RECTIFIER MODULE
PD6016A
PD10016A
CHARGE RESISTOR
HF5C5504
GRZG400
DC CONTACTOR
FC1UL
FC4UL
SC7NUL
SC8NUL
SCN8
DC FUSE
CR6L150UL
CR6L200UL
CR6L300UL
A70Q4004
A70Q5004
A70Q6004
A70QS8004
A70P16004TA
A70P20004
80W 7.5ohm
600W 5ohm
AC220VAUX2B
AC220VAUX2B
AC200-240V
AC200-240V
AC200-240V
600V 150A
600V 200A
600V 300A
TRANSFORMER
HF5C55025512VA
HF5C550312524VA
HF5B661330016VA
HF5B395170020VA
INPUT MODULE CARD
EP3985C2
EP3985C4
12
3
12
12
12
24
24
30
30
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10-5
Notes:
10-6
Three-phase 230V series
(NEMA Type1)
(NEMA Type12)
(NEMA Type4)
(Open, Type 12 Heatsink)
(Open)
11-1
Maximum Freq.
Base Freq.
Starting Freq.
Carrier Freq. *8)
Starting torque
Braking torque
Standard Time
Duty cycle
Braking torque
Options
Time
Duty cycle
DC injection braking
Volt/Freq Characteristic
Torque boost
Setting resolution
Accuracy (Stability)
Setting
Voltage / frequency variations

Momentary voltage dip
capability *6)
Rated Frequency
Phases, Voltage, Frequency
F50
001
002
003
005
s
%
s
%
33
25
46
15
18
015
59
20
23
020
74
25
29
025
87
30
34
030
(Maximum voltage[V] - Minimum voltage[V] )

3-phase averaging voltage[V]
X 67 [%]
80 to 240V (with AVR control) at base and maximum frequency, adjustable

Constant toruque load
Variable torque load
Automatic (setting code)
:
0.0
Manual (setting code)
:
2.0 to 20.0
0.1 to 1.9 *9)
200% (with Dynamic torque vector control selected)
150%
100%
20% *10)
10
5
5
10
5
3
5
3
2
3
2
150%
90
45
45
45
30
20
10
8
37
22
18
10
7
5
5
5
Starting frequency : 0.1 to 60.0Hz , Braking time : 0.0 to 30.0s , Braking level : 0 to 100% of rated current
NEMA Type1, Type4
NEMA Type1, Type12
Natural
Fan cooling
-UL/cUL
-LOW VOLTAGE directive -IEC 61800-2 (Rating,
-EMC directive -IEC 61800-3 (EMC product
specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency standard including specific test methods)
a.c. power drive systems)
1/20000 of Maximum frequency ex.) 0.003Hz at 60Hz , 0.01Hz at 400Hz

0.01Hz (Fixed)
*6) Input power : 85%

*8) If carrier frequency is set at more than 10kHz and an overheat condition (detected by internal thermal sensor ) occurs,inverter will automatically reduce carrier frequency to 8kHz ,
in order to avoid trip.(Available up to 30HP unit)
*9) When setting into 0.1,the starting torque gets 50%
*10) With a nominal applied motor.(Average torque when the motor decelerates and stops from 60Hz. It may change according to the motor loss.)
*11) Above 120Hz application, please contact the factory.
Unbalance in power supply voltage [%] =
10
13
010
7.5
9.9
007
50
57
050
60
71
060
215
75
85
075
283
100
112
100
346
125
137
125
Open, Open with NEMA Type 12 Heatsink, NEMA 1

15 to 10% *10)
No limit
No limit
100%
10
10
0.75 to 10kHz
3-phase, 200 to 220V /50Hz , 200 to 230V /60Hz

* 220 to 230V /50Hz *4),
-Frequency :+5 to -5%
115
145
180
150% of rated current for 1min ,
180% of rated current for 0.5s
40
45
040
-Voltage : +10 to -15% ( Voltage unbalance *5) : 2% or less )

When the input voltage is 165V or more, the inverter can be operated continuously.
When the input voltage drops below 165V from rated voltage, the inverter can be operated for 15ms . (within 85% load of nominal applied motors)
The smooth recovery method is selectable.
50 to 400Hz *11)
25 to 400Hz *11)
0.1 to 60Hz, Continuous time : 0.0 to 10.0s
0.75 to 15kHz
The minimum carrier frequency changes depend on maximum output frequency.
-Analog setting
: 0.2% of Maximum frequency (at 25 10 degrees C)
-Digital setting
: 0.01% of Maximum frequency (at -10 to +50 degrees C)
-Analog setting
: 1/3000 of Maximum frequency ex.) 0.02Hz at 60Hz ,0.15Hz at 400Hz
-Digital setting
: 0.01Hz at Maximum frequency of up to 99.99Hz (0.1Hz at Maximum frequency of 100Hz and above)
-Link setting
: Two methods are selectable.
Hz 50, 60Hz
3-phase, 200 to 230V , 50/60Hz
HP
1/4
1/2
1
2
3
5
kVA
0.59
1.1
1.9
3.1
4.3
6.7
V 3-phase, 200V /50Hz ,
200V ,220V ,230V /60Hz
A
1.5
3.0
5.0
8.0
11
17
150% of rated current for 1min , 200% of rated current for 0.5s
F25
NOTES
*1) Inverter output capacity [kVA] at 230V.
*2) Output voltage is proportional to the power supply voltage and can't exceed the power supply voltage.
*3) Current derating may be required in case of low impedance load such as high frequency motor.
*4) 220 to 230V/50Hz : Order individually
*5) Reference to the IEC 61800-3( 5.2.3 )
Enclosure
Cooling method
Standards
Braking
Control
Output
frequency
Input
ratings
Nominal 230V system pplied motor

Output
Rated Capacity *1)
ratings
Rated Voltage *2)
Rated Current *3)
Overload Capability
6KG1123_ _ _X1 * *
6KG1123_ _ _ X2 * *
6KG1123_ _ _ X4 * *
6KG1123_ _ _ X8 * *
6KG1123_ _ _ X9 * *
Type designation ( * * indicate product revision)
11. Specifications
11.1 Standard Specifications
11-2
Three-phase 460V series
Standards
Starting torque
Braking torque
Time
Duty cycle
Braking torque
Options
Time
Duty cycle
Volt/Freq Characteristic
Torque boost
Setting resolution
001
002
003
010
39
25
31
025
45
30
35
030
50
59
050
60
72
060
75
89
075
20% *11)
-UL/cUL
(Maximum voltage[V] - Minimum voltage[V] )

3-phase averaging voltageV
U2
CN UX connector
U1 (Factory setting)
X 67 [%]
-LOW VOLTAGE directive -IEC 61800-2 Rating,

-EMC directive -IEC 61800-3 (EMC product
specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency a.c. standard including specific test methods)
power drive systems)
3
2
150%
45
45
30
20
10
8
22
10
7
5
5
5
Starting frequency : 0.1 to 60.0Hz , Braking time : 0.0 to 30.0s, Braking level : 0 to 100% of rated current
NEMA Type1, Type 4
NEMA Type1, Type12
Natural
No limit
No limit
150
100
119
100
Variable torque load

0.1 to 1.9 *9)
210
150
167
150
253
200
201
200
15 to 10% *11)
-Frequency :+5 to -5%
Open, Open with NEMA Type 12 Heatsink, NEMA Type 1

Fan cooling
100%
10
10
176
125
140
125
0.75 to 10kHz
3-phase, 380 to 440V /50Hz , 380 to 480V /60Hz

* 380V/50Hz and 380 to 415V/60Hz *4)
60
75
91
112
40
47
040
*6) Input power : 85%

*8) If carrier frequency is set at more than 10kHz and an overheat condition (detected by internal thermal sensor ) occurs, inverter will automatically reduce carrier frequency to 8kHz ,
in order to avoid trip.(Available up to 30HP unit)
*9) When setting into 0.1, the starting torque gets 50%
*10) Above 120Hz application, please contact the factory
*11) With a nominal applied motor.(Average torque when the motor decelerates and stops from 60Hz. It may change according to the motor loss.)
Unbalance in power supply voltage [%] =
30
24
320 to 480V (with AVR control) at base and maximum frequency, adjustable
Constant toruque load
0.0
2.0 to 20.0
Input voltage
400 to 440V/50Hz, 440 to 480V/60Hz
380V/50Hz (398V or smaller),
380 to 415V/60Hz (430V or smaller)
*5) Reference to the IEC 61800-3( 5.2.3 )
20
23
020
15
19
015
1/20000 of Maximum frequency ex.) 0.003Hz at 60Hz , 0.01Hz at 400Hz

0.01Hz (Fixed)
Automatic (setting code)

Manual (setting code)
150%
100%
s
5
5
%
5
3
5
3
2
s
%
007
5
7.5
10
7.1
10
14
380V , 400V , 440V , 460V /60Hz
9.0
13
18
005
-Voltage : +10 to -15% ( Voltage unbalance *5) : 2% or less )

When the input voltage is 310V or more, the inverter can be operated continuously.
When the input voltage drops below 310V from rated voltage, the inverter can be operated for 15ms . (less than 85% load of nominal applied motors)
The smooth recovery method is selectable.
50 to 400Hz *10)
25 to 400Hz *10)
0.1 to 60Hz , Continuous time : 0.0 to 10.0s
0.75 to 15kHz
The minimum carrier frequency changes depend on maximum output frequency.
-Analog setting
: 0.2% of Maximum frequency (at 25 10 degrees C)
-Digital setting
: 0.01% of Maximum frequency (at -10 to +50 degrees C)
-Analog setting
: 1/3000 of Max. frequency ex.) 0.02Hz at 60Hz , 0.15Hz at 400Hz
-Digital setting
: 0.01Hz at Maximum frequency of up to 99.99Hz (0.1Hz at Maximum frequency of 100Hz and above)
-Link setting
: Two methods are selectable.
HP
1/2
1
2
3
kVA
1.1
1.9
2.9
4.3
V 3-phase, 380V , 400V , 415V /50Hz ,
A
1.5
2.5
3.7
5.5
Hz 50, 60Hz
3-phase, 380 to 480V , 50/60Hz
F50
NOTES
*1) Inverter output capacity [kVA] at 460V.
*2) Output voltage is proportional to the power supply voltage and can't exceed the power supply voltage.
*3) Current derating may be required in case of low impedance load such as high frequency motor.
*4) Change the tap of auxiliary transformer.
380V/50Hz and 380 to 415V/60Hz : Change over CN UX connector from U1 part to U2 part. (Reference to the Instruction manual)
Standards
Maximum Freq.
Base Freq.
Starting Freq.
Carrier Freq. *8)
Accuracy (Stability)
Setting
Voltage / frequency variations

Momentary voltage dip
capability *6)
Rated Frequency
Phases, Voltage, Frequency
Enclosure
Cooling method
Braking
Control
Output
frequency
Input
ratings
Norminal 460V system applied motor

Rated Capacity *1)
Rated Voltage *2)
Rated Current *3)
Overload Capability
(NEMA Type1)
(NEMA Type12)
(NEMA Type 4)
(Open, Type 12 Heatsink)
(Open)
Type designation ( * * indicate product revision)
6KG1143_ _ _X1 * *
6KG1143_ _ _ X2 * *
6KG1143_ _ _ X4 * *
6KG1143_ _ _ X8 * *
6KG1143_ _ _ X9 * *
304
250
242
250
377
300
300
300
415
350
330
350
520
400
414
400
585
650
500
518
450
500
466
450
740
590
600
600
11.2 Common Specifications

Item
Control Method
Output
frequency
Maximum
frequency
Base
frequency
Starting
frequency
Carrier
frequency
Accuracy
(stability)
Control
Setting
resolution
Voltage/frequency
Characteristics
Torque Boost
Accelerating/decelerating
time
Operation
Function equipped
Explanation
Sinusoidal wave PWM control (with V/F control, torque vector control, PG feedback vector
control (option)
50 to 400 Hz variable setting
25 to 400 Hz variable setting
0.1 to 60 Hz variable setting Holding time: 0.0 to 10.0 s
0.75 to 15k Hz (75 HP or less) 0.75 to 10k Hz (100 HP or more)
Analog setting: +/- 0.2% or less of the max. frequency (at 25 +/- 10C)
Digital Setting: +/- 0.01% or less of the max frequency (-10 to +50C)
Analog setting: 1/3000 of max. frequency (e.g. 0.02 Hz / 60 Hz, 0.05 Hz / 150 Hz) Digital setting: 0.01
Hz (99.99 Hz or less), 0.1 Hz (100.0 Hz or more)
Output voltage at base frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (200V series) or
320 to 480V (400V series)
Auto: Optimum control corresponding to the load torque.
Manual: 0.1 to 20.0 code setting (energy savings reduced torque, constant torque (strong) etc.)
0.01 to 3600s
Four accelerating and decelerating time settings are possible independent of each other by
selecting digital input signals.
In addition to linear acceleration and deceleration, either S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
(weal/strong) or curvilinear acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
Starting frequency: 0.0 to 60 Hz, braking time: 0.0 to 30.0s
Braking levels: 0 to 100%
Frequency upper and lower limiter, bias frequency, frequency gain, jump frequency, pick-up
operation, restart after momentary power failure, switching operation from line to drive, slip
compensation control, automatic energy saving operation, regeneration avoiding control, droop
control, torque limiting (2-strp), torque control, PID control, second motor switching, cooling fan
ON/OFF control.
Operation method
Keypad panel: Run by FWD REV keys, stop by STOP key.

Terminal input: Forward/Stop command, Reverse/Stop command, Coast-to-Stop command,
Alarm reset, acceleration/deceleration selection, multistep frequency selection, etc.
Frequency setting
Keypad panel: setting by UP and DOWN keys

External potentiometer: External freq. Setting POT (VR) (1 to 5k ohm)
Analog input: 0 to +10V (0 to 5V), 4 to 20 mA, o to 10V (FWD/REV operation)
+10 to 0 (reverse operation), 20 to 4 mA (reverse operation)
UP/DOWN control: Frequency increases or decreases as long as the digital input signals are
turned on
Multistep frequency selection: Up to 15 steps are selectable by a combination of digital input
signals (four kinds)
Link operation: Operation by RS485 (standard)
Program operation: Pattern operation by program
Jogging operation: Jogging operation by FWD, REV key or digital input signals.
Operation status signal
Transistor output (4 signals): Running, frequency, arrival, frequency detection, overload early
warning, etc.
Relay output (2 signals): Alarm output (for any fault), multi-purpose output signals
Analog output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output voltage, output torque, power
consumption, etc.
Pulse output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output power, output torque, power
consumption, etc.
11-3
11.2 Common Specifications (continued)

Item
Indication
Digital display LED
Liquid crystal display

Language
Environment
Lamp display
Explanation
Output frequency, setting frequency, output current, output voltage, motor synchronous speed,
line speed, load rotation speed, calculated PID value, PID command value, PID feedback value,
alarm code.
Operation information, operational guide, functional code/name/setting data, alarm information,
tester function, motor load rate measuring function (Maximum/average current (rms) during
measuring period, maintenance information (integrated operation hours, capacitance
measurement for main circuit capacitors, heatsink temperature, etc.
Six languages (Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, Italian)
Charging (voltage residual), operation indication
Protective function
Overcurrent, short-circuit, ground fault, overvoltage, undervoltage, overload, overheating, blown

fuse, motor overload, external alarm, input open-phase, output open0phase (when tuning),
braking resistor protection, CPU and memory error, keypad panel communications error, PTC
thermistor protection, surge protection, stall prevention, etc.
Installation location
Indoor, altitude less than 3300 feet (1000m), free from corrosive gas, dust and direct sunlight.
Ambient temperature
-10 to +50C (+14 to 122F) (ventilating cover must be removed under conditions exceeding +40C
(+104F) for models rated at 30 HP or less)
Vibration
Storage
3mm peak from 2-9 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 from 9-20 Hz, 2m/s2 from 20-55 Hz, 1 m/s2 from 55-200 Hz,
Ambient
temperature
-25 to 65C (-13 to 149F)
Ambient
humidity
5 to 95% (no condensation)
11-4
11.3 Outline Dimensions

4.34(110)
0.28(7)
3.78(96)
D1
0.24(6)
0.28(7)
5.91(150)
0.28(7)
0.28(7)
D2
Main circuit terminals

(M4)
D3
0.61(15.5)
9.69(246)
10.25(260)
Auxiliary control
power supply terminals
(M3, 5)
NP
0.61(15.5)
1.56(39.5)
3.43(87)
0.28(6)
0.31(8)
3-0.87(22)
Wire inlet
knock out
hole
1.22(31)
1.73(44)
8.66(220)
0.47(12)
D2
3.15
(80)
3.74
(95)
D3
3.7
(94)
4.29
(109)
D4
2.81
(71.5)
3.41
(86.5)
2 to 5 Hp
0.47(12)
7.68(195)
4.09(104)
0.44(11)
7.72(196)
2-0.39(10)
0.31(8)
3-0.87(22)
Wire inlet
Knock out
hole
3.92(99.5)
D1
1.44
(26.5)
2.03
(51.5)
3.74(95)
4.29(109)
1.22(31)
1.06(27)
D4
D
5.12
(130)
5.71
(145)
0.24(6)
Control circuit terminals

(M3)
NP
0.24(6)
1 Hp
2.42 (61.5)
0.28(7)
9.69(246)
10.25(260)

(M3, 5)
5.71(145)
5.35(136)
2-0.24(6)

M3
Type
1/4, 1/2 Hp
0.28(7)
0.28(7)
2-0.24(6)
9.84(250)
8.90(226)
0.47(12)
2-0.39(10)
0.39(10)
0.47(12)
7.68(195)
4.17(106)
0.44(11)
0.28(7)
0.39(10)

(M5)
0.44(11)
14.88(378)
15.76(400)
(M5)
6.26(159)
0.31(8)
5.06(128.5)
5.12(130)
0.39(10)
2.07(52.5)
2-1.34(34)
Wire inlet
knock out hole
1.34(34)
Wire inlet
knock out hole
7.5, 10 Hp
2.42(61.5)
2.54(64.5)
11-5
0.44(11)
2.17(55)
5.75(146)
5.51(140)
5.67(144)

NP
1.81(46)
1.06(27)
Wire inlet
knock out hole
Auxiliary control
(M3, 5)
5.49(139.5)
0.39(10)
2.28(58)

(M3)
NP
Auxiliary control
(M3, 5)
10.25(260)
9.37(238)
(M3)
6.26(159)
0.31(8)
2-1.65(42)
Wire inlet
knock out hole
15 to 30 Hp
11.3.1 Outline Dimensions NEMA 1
230V Series NEMA 1

Hp
40
50
W1
9.4
(240)
10.8
(275)
W3
W4
13.5
(342)
14.9
(377)
60
H1
20.9
(530)
23.4
(595)
28.3
(720)
H2
19.7
(500)
22.2
(565)
27.2
(690)
DIMENSIONS inches (mm)

H3
H6
H7
H9
20.2
0.4
7.1
3
(512)
(9)
(180) (75)
22.7
7.9
(577)
(200)
27.6
(702)
H10
29.7
(755)
33.1
(840)
38
(965)
D
10
(255)
10.6
(270)
33.5
(850)
27
(685)
32.1
(815)
27.4
(695)
32.5
(825)
41.3
(1050)
50.4
(1280)
11.2
(285)
14.2
(360)
H1
20.9
(530)
H2
19.7
(500)

H3
H6
H7
H9
20.2
0.4
7.1
3
(512)
(9)
(180) (75)
H10
29.7
(755)
D
10
(255)
10.6
(270)
25.8
(655)
24.6
(625)
25.1
(637)
34.6
(880)
28.3
(720)
28
(710)
38
(970)
27.2
(690)
26.6
(675)
37
(935)
27.6
(702)
27
(685)
37
(945)
D2
0.2
(4)
D3
5.7
(145)
D4
4.1
(105)
8.7
(220)
3.6
(91)
6.5
(166)
D3
5.7
(145)
D4
4.1
(105)
6.9
(175)
8.7
(220)
4.7
(121)
7
(166)
Mtg.
Bolts
M8
75
100
125
16.9
(430)
22.8
(580)
11.4
(290)
21
(533)
26.9
(683)
0.5
(13)
11.1
(283)
15.1
(383)
3.3
(83)
M12
Wt.
Lb (kg)
70
(32)
86
(39)
106
(48)
110
(50)
172
(78)
282
(128)
460V Series NEMA 1

Hp
40
50
W1
9.4
(240)
10.8
(275)
W3
W4
13.5
(342)
14.9
(377)
60
D2
0.2
(4)
Mtg.
Bolts
M8
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
16.9
(430)
22.8
(580)
21
(533)
11.4
(290)
0.5
(13)
26.9
(683)
11-6
7.9
(200)
8.2
(208)
13
(333)
15.1
(383)
38
(965)
3.3
(83)
53.1
(1350)
55.1
(1400)
12.4
(315)
14.2
(360)
M12
Wt.
Lb (kg)
70
(32)
82
(37)
95
(43)
97
(44)
115
(52)
174
(79)
245
(111)
337
(153)
Surface Mount
W
W6
D1
H8
H2
D2
D7
H9
W1
W3
W5
W4
D3
D5
D6
Holes for
mtg. bolts
D4
H1
4-C
460V Series NEMA 1

Hp
400
450
500
600
W
26.8
(680)
34.6
(880)
W1
22.8
(580)
30.7
(780)
W4
10.2
(260)

W5
W6
H1
H2
24.0
21.9
53.9
52.4
(610)
(555) (1370) (1330)
31.9
29.7
(810)
(755)
Hp
400
450
500
600
W3
11.4
(290)
10.2
(260)
D2
0.3
(6)
D3
2.0
(50)
D4
3.9
(100)
D5
1.4
(35)
D6
4.5
(115)
D7
8.7
(220)
Mtg.
Bolts
M12
Wt.
Lb (kg)
562
(255)
804
(365)
11-7
H4
52.6
(1335)
H8
3.3
(084)
H9
57.1
(1450)
D
17.7
(450)
D1
11.2
(285)
11.3.2 Outline Dimensions Open Type

Surface Mount
Through Panel Mount
H1
230V Series
Hp
230V
40
50
W
13.4
(340)
14.8
(375)
W1
9.4
(240)
10.8
(275)
W2
12.8
(326)
14.2
(361)
20.9
(530)
26.8
(680)
16.9
(430)
22.8
(580)
20.1
(510)
26
(660)
W
13.4
(340)
14.8
(375)
W1
9.4
(240)
10.8
(275)
W2
12.8
(326)
14.2
(361)
W3
60
H
21.7
(550)
24.2
(615)
29.1
(740)
H1
20.9
(530)
23.4
(595)
28.3
(720)
DIMENSION Inch (mm)

H2
H3
H4
19.7
20.2
0.5
(500)
(512)
(12)
22.2
22.7
(565)
(577)
27.2
27.6
(690)
(702)
H5
1
(25)
H6
0.4
(9)
D
10
(255)
10.6
(270)
1.3
(33)
0.5
(13)
11.2
(285)
14.2
(360)
D1
5.7
(145)
D2
0.2
(4)
C
0.4
(10)
Mtg.
Bolts
M8
75
100
125
460V Series
Hp
460V
40
50
W3
60
29.5
(750)
34.6
(880)
27
(685)
32.1
(815)
27.4
(695)
32.5
(825)
33.5
(850)
H
21.7
(550)
H1
20.9
(530)
26.6
(675)
25.8
(655)
24.6
(625)
25.1
(637)
29.1
(740)
28.3
(720)
28
(710)
38.2
(970)
27.2
(690)
26.6
(675)
36.8
(935)
27.6
(702)
27
(682)
37.2
(945)
0.6
(16)
DIMENSION Inch (mm)

H2
H3
H4
19.7
20.2
0.5
(500)
(512)
(12)
0.6
(15)
M12
8.7
(220)
H5
1
(25)
H6
0.4
(9)
D
10
(255)
10.6
(270)
D1
5.7
(145)
1.3
(33)
0.5
(13)
12.4
(315)
14.2
(360)
6.9
(175)
8.7
(220)
D2
0.2
(4)
C
0.4
(10)
Mtg.
Bolts
M8
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
20.9
(530)
16.9
(430)
20.1
(510)
39.4
(1000)
26.8
(680)
22.8
(580)
26
(660)
11.4
(290)
11-8
0.6
(16)
0.6
(15)
M12
Weight
Lb (kg)
64
(29)
79
(36)
97
(44)
101
(46)
154
(70)
253
(115)
Weight
Lb (kg)
64
(29)
75
(34)
86
(39)
88
(40)
106
(48)
154
(70)
220
(100)
308
(140)
Surface Mount
3 or 4 dia. C
W1
W3
Through Panel Mount

D1
W4
H6
D1
D1
D2
D2
W2
W2
D2
H6
H2 H1
Alternative Through
Panel Mount (bottom
bracket support by
customer supply.
W1
W1
W3
W5
W4
W3
W4
W
H7
W4
H7
Holes for
mtg. bolts
H4
H4
W3
D5
4-dia.1.4 (35)
Lifting bolts
D3
D6
Holes for
mtg. bolts
Holes for
mtg. bolts
D4
H3 H1
H1
4-C
460V Series Open Type

Hp
400
450
500
600
W
26.8
(680)
34.6
(880)
Hp
400
450
500
600
W1
22.8
(580)
30.7
(780)
W2
26.0
(660)
33.8
(860)
W3
11.4
(290)
10.2
(260)
W4
10.2
(260)
W5
24.0
(610)
31.9
(810)
D6
4.5
(115)
C
0.6
(015)

D2
0.3
(6)
D3
2
(50)
D4
3.9
(100)
D5
1.4
(35)

H
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
55.1
53.9
52.4
52.8
52.6
0.6
(1400) (1370) (1330) (1340) (1335) (016)
Mtg.
Bolts
M12
Wt.
Lb (kg)
551
(250)
793
(360)
11-9
H6
1.4
(035)
H7
0.6
(015)
D
17.7
(450)
D1
11.2
(285)
11.3.3 Outline Dimensions Open Type with NEMA 12 Heatsink
11-10
AF-300 G11 230 VAC Series

DIMENSIONS Inch(mm)
HP W
40 15.04
(382)
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
14.41
(366)
13.39
(340)
12.83 9.45
(326) (240)
4.72
(120)
16.42
15.79
14.76
14.21 10.83
5.41
(417)
(401)
(375)
(361)
W7 W8 W9
50
60
(275)
(137.5)
H1
Fixing
H2
H3
21.65 20.87
(550) (530)
19.69
(500)
20.16
(512)
24.21 23.43
22.24
22.72
0.47
0.98
0.35
1.67
(615)
(565)
(577)
(12)
(25)
(9)
(42.5) (170)
27.17
27.64
4.13
(690)
(702)
(105)
1.75
(595)
29.13
(740)
75
28.35
(720)
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
3.74
(95)
H9
H10 H11
H12
20.87
(530)
6.69
D1
Wt.
8.86
(225)
66
(30)
23.43 0.43
0.4
5.71
M6
81
(595)
(10) 10.63 (145)
and
(37)
(270)
M8
(11)
-
Fig
Bolts Lb(kg)
28.35
(720)
99
(45)
104
(47)
100 23.23
22.28
20.87
20.08 16.93
8.46
29.53
26.97
27.36
(590)
(566)
(530)
(510)
(430)
(215)
(750)
(685)
(695)
125 29.13
(740)
28.19
(716)
26.77
(680)
25.98 22.83 11.42

(660) (580) (290)
34.65 33.46
(880) (850)
32.09
(815)
32.48 (15.5) (32.5) (12.5) 4.02 8.46

(825)
(102) (215)
2.95
(75)
0.61
1.28
8.27
0.49 (44.5) (210)

33.46
(850)
11.22 5.71
M6
161
0.51
0.6 (285) (145)
and
(73)
(13)
(15) 14.17 8.66

(360) (220)
M12
260
(118)
Fixing
Wt
Fig
AF-300 G11 460 VAC Series

DIMENSIONS Inch(mm)
HP W
40 15.04
(382)
50
60
16.42
(417)
W1
W2
14.41
(366)
13.39
(340)
15.79
(401)
14.76
(375)
W3
W4
W5
12.83 9.45
(326) (240)
W7 W8 W9
4.72
(120)
14.21 10.83
(361) (275)
75
W6
5.41
(137.5)
-
H2
H3
21.65 20.87
(550) (530)
19.69
(500)
20.16
(512)
26.57 25.79
(675) (655)
24.61
(625)
25.08
(637)
29.13
(740)
29.13
(740)
125
150
22.28
(566)
20.87
(530)
20.08 16.93
(510) (430)
28.19
(716)
26.77
(680)
25.98 22.83 11.42

(660) (580) (290)
400 29.13
450 (740)
28.19
(716)
26.77
(680)
25.98 22.83 11.42

(660) (580) (290)
2.95 4.55 2.60

(75) (115.5) (66)
500 37.01
600 (940)
36.06
(916)
34.65
(880)
33.86 30.71 10.24

(860) (780) (260)
4.72
(120)
H4
28.35
(720)
27.95
(710)
27.17
(690)
26.57
(675)
0.98
(25)
H6
0.35
(9)
27.64
(702)
26.97
(685)
8.46
(215)
0.47
(12)
H5
H7
H8
H9
3.74
(95)
20.87
(530)
6.69
2.85 (170)
(72.5)
25.79
(655)
H10 H11
H12
D1
Bolts Lb(kg)
8.86
(225)
0.43
(11)
0.4
5.71
(10) 10.63 (145)
(270)
M6
and
M8
100
23.23
200 (590)
250
300 29.13
350 (740)
H1
4.13
(105)
1.56 8.27
(39.5) (210)
28.35
(720)
27.95
(710)
0.61 1.28 0.49

(15.5) (32.5) (12.5)
12.4 6.89
(315) (175)
0.51
(13)
0.6
(15)
M6
and
M12
66
(30)
77
(35)
88
(40)
90
(41)
108
(49)
161
(73)
229
(104)
317
(144)
M8
551
55.12 53.94 52.36 52.76 0.61 1.38 0.57 0.18 6.99 8.46 5.71 54.37 0.81 0.59 17.72 11.22 and
2.76 2.56 4.33 (1400) (1370) (1330) (1340) (15.5) (35) (14.5) (4.5) (177.5) (215) (145) (1381) (20.5) (15) (450) (285) M12
(70) (65) (110)
(250)
793
(360)
2.95
(75)
39.37 38.19
(1000) (970)
36.81
(935)
37.20
(945)
11-11
2.15 8.46
(54.5) (215)
38.19
(970)
14.17 8.66
(360) (220)
Keypad Mounting Hole (Panel Cutting)

Dimensions in inches (mm)
dia. 0.11 M3
2.52 (64)
0.81 (20.5)
4.53 (115)
1.69 (42)
dia. 1.38 (35)
11-12
12. RS485 Modbus RTU Serial Communications

The serial interface supports operation, configuration and monitoring of drive functions through an EIA/RS485 connection. The serial interface is based on Modbus RTU protocol. This protocol allows the drive to function as an RTU slave
on an industrial network.
12.1 Transmission Specification

Item
Physical level
Transmission distance
Number of nodes
Transmission speed
Transmission mode
Transmission protocol
Character code
Character length
Error check
Specification
EIA/RS485
500 m max.
32 total
19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 [bits/s]
Half duplex
Modbus RTU
Binary
8 bits
CRC
12.2 Connection
Connection method
Use shielded wire and connect to the control terminals (DX-, DX+ and SD). A termination resistor should be added
between the data lines on the each end of the network. The value of the termination resistor depends on the characteristic impedance of the cable. A common value for termination resistors is 120 ohms.
Control terminals
Terminal
marking
DX+
DXSD
Terminal name
RS485 communication data (+)
RS485 communication data ()
Cable shield
Function description
Input/output terminals for RS485
communication.
Electrically floating
12.3 Serial Interface Configuration

Drive function codes H30 to H39 are used to configure the serial interface parameters, such as device address, baud
rate and error response.
12.4 Modbus RTU Functions

The following RTU functions are supported. The maximum number of consecutive parameters for function 03 and 16
messages is 16.
Code
03
06
16
Description
Read Holding Registers (16 registers maximum)
Preset Single Register
Preset Multiple Registers (16 registers maximum)
12-1
12.5 Drive Function Code Access

All of the drive function codes are accessible through the RS485 serial interface. Drive function codes are mapped to
RTU holding registers. A drive function code RTU address is 2 bytes in length. The high byte corresponds to a code that
represents the drive parameter sort (FM). The low byte corresponds to the drive parameter number within the sort (0 99).
Code
0
1
2
3
4
Sort
F
E
C
P
H
Name
Basic function
Terminal function
Control function
Motor 1 function
High level function
Code
5
6
7
8
Sort
A
o
S
M
Name
Motor 2 function
Option function
Command/function data
Monitor data
For example, drive function code M11, output current, is addressed as RTU parameter number 080B hexadecimal or
2059 decimal.
high byte
low byte
drive
parameter
sort
code
drive
parameter
number
12.6 Command and Monitor Data Registers
The command and monitor function codes are used to control the operation of the drive and monitor the status variables
through the serial interface. The command and monitor function codes are not accessible from the drive keypad
interface. Drive parameter H30 and digital input signal LE must be enabled to operate the drive from the Modbus
interface. If LE is not assigned to a digital input (X1-X9), the signal will default to ON.
Frequency Setting Registers
Address Code
1793
S01
Name
Frequency command
Unit
-
1797
Frequency command
Hz
S05
Variable Range
-2000020000
(max. frequency at 20000)
0.00400.00
Min. unit
Read/
Write
Data
Format
1
0.01
R/W
R/W
2
5
Note:
1) If both S01 and S05 are set, the drive will ignore the setting of S05.
2) A data setting that exceeds the setting range is possible, but the actual action will be limited by the drive configuration.
Operation command data Registers
Address Code
1798
1799
1804
S06
S07
S12
Name
Operation command
Universal Do
Universal Ao
Unit
Variable Range
Min. unit
Refer to the data format [14]

Refer to the data format [15]
-2000020000
(100% output at 20000 )
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
Data
Format
14
15
2
Note:
1) Since X1X9 are configurable input commands, it is necessary to set the functions by E01E09.
2) The alarm reset is executed, when RST signal changes from ON to OFF even if there are no alarms.
3) Universal Do is a function that utilizes the drives digital outputs via communication.
Function data Registers
Address Code
1800
1801
1802
S08
S09
S10
1803
S11
Note:
1)
2)
Name
Acceleration time F07
Deceleration time F08
Torque limit level 1
(driving) F40
Torque limit level 2
(braking) F41
Unit
Variable range
s
s
%
0.13600.0
0.13600.0
-20.00 200.00, 999
0.00, 20.00200.00, 999
Min. unit
0.1
0.1
1
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
Data
Format
3
3
5
R/W
The writing of data out of range is treated as out of range error.

Use a value of 7FFFH to enter 999 for torque limit functions.
12-2
Monitoring parameter registers

Address Code
2049
M01
2053
M05
2054
M06
2055
2056
2057
2058
M07
M08
M09
M10
2059
M11
2060
2061
M12
M13
2062
2063
M14
M15
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
2069
2071
2072
2073
2074
M21
M23
M24
M25
M26
2075
M27
2079
M31
2080
Description
Frequency command (final
command)
Frequency command (final
command)
Actual frequency
Unit
Hz
-
Range
Min. unit
- 2000020000 (max. frequency

at 20000)
0400.00
- 2000020000
(max. frequency at 20000)
- 200.00200.00
- 200.00200.00
0.00400.00
0.00200.00
Read
/ Write
R
Data
Format
2
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
R
R
R
R
6
6
5
5
0.01
1
-
R
R
3
14
Actual torque value

Torque current
Output frequency
Motor output (input
electric power)
Output current r. m. s.
%
%
Hz
%
Output voltage r. m. s.
Operation command (final
command)
Operating state
Universal output terminal
data
Fault memory 0
Fault memory 1
Fault memory 2
Fault memory 3
Integrated operating time
V
-
0.00200.00 (inverter rating at

100.00)
0.0600.0
Refer to data format [14]

R
R
16
15
065535
10
10
10
10
1
V
-
01000
064999
1
1
-
R
R
R
R
R
1
17
11
1
20
- 2000020000 (max. frequency

at 20000 )
0400.00
0.01
M32
DC link voltage
Type code
Drive capacity code
ROM version
Transmission error
processing code
Frequency command at
alarm (final command)
Frequency command at
alarm (final command)
Actual frequency at alarm
2081
2082
2083
M33
M34
M35
Actual torque at alarm

Torque current at alarm
Output frequency at alarm
%
%
Hz
(max. frequency a t 20000)

- 200.00 200.00
- 200.00 200.00
0.00 400.
0.01
0.01
0.01
R
R
R
6
6
5
2084
M36
0.00200.00
0.01
2085
M37
M38
0.00 200.00 (inverter rating at

100.00)
0.0 600.0
0.01
2086
2087
M39
14
2088
M40
Motor output at alarm

(input power)
Output current r.m.s. at
alarm
Output voltage effective
value at alarm
Operation command at
alarm
Operating state at alarm
16
2089
M41
15
2090
M42
065535
2091
M43

data at alarm
Integrated operation time
at alarm
DC link voltage at alarm
01000
2092
M44
0120
2093
M45
Inverter internal air temp.

at alarm
Cooling fin temp. at alarm
0120
2094
M46
0.0100.0
0.1
2095
M47
065535
2096
M48
Life of main circuit

capacitor.
Life of printed circuit
board capacitor.
Life of cooling fan.
065535
Hz
-
- 2000020000
12-3
12.7 Data Format Specification

All data in the data field of communication frame shall be represented by a 16 bit length word.
15
14
13
12
11
10
16 bits binary data
Data format [1]

Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 1
Example If F15 (Frequency limit, upper)= 60Hz
60 = 003CH
Data format [2] ]
Example data = -20
-20 = FFECH
Integer data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 1
Data format [3]

Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.1
Example: If F17 (frequency gain setting signal) = 100.0%
100.0 X 10 = 1000 = 03E8H
Data format [4]
Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.1
Example If: C31 (Analog input offset adjust, terminal12) = - 5.0%
- 5.0 X 10= - 50 = FFCEH
Data format [5]
Example: If C05 (multi-step frequency 1) = 50.25Hz
50.25 X 100 = 5025 = 13A1H
Data format [6]
Example: If M07 (actual torque value)= - 85.38%
- 85.38 X 100= - 8538=DEA6H
Data format [7]
Example: If o05 (follow - up side ASR 1 constant) = 0.105s
0.105 X 1000 = 105 = 0069H
Data format [8]
Example: Data = -1.234
- 1.234 X 1000 = - 1234 = FB2EH
Data format [9]
Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 2
Example If P01 (Motor 1 number of poles) =2pole
2 = 0002H
Data format [10]
Alarm Code
12-4
Code
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
10
11
14
16
17
18
19
Description
No alarm
Overcurrent, during acceleration (INV output )
Overcurrent, during deceleration (INV output )
Overcurrent, during steady state operation
(INV output )
Ground fault
Overvoltage, during acceleration
Over voltage, during deceleration
Overvoltage, during steady state operation
DC undervoltage
Power supply open phase
Blown DC fuse
Output wiring error
Overheat, heat sink, inverter
Overheat, outside thermal
Overheat, unit inside temp
Data format [11]

Code
7
15
25
50
100
200
300
500
750
1000
1500
Data format [12]
27
28
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
dbH
OL1
OL2
OLU
Overspeed
PG wire break
Memory error
Keypad error
CPU error
Option comm error
Option error
PL error
Output wiring error
RS485 comm error
OS
Pg
Er1
Er2
Er3
Er4
Er5
Er6
Er7
Er8
Code
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
6000
7500
10000
12500
15000
Capacity (HP)
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
Code
17500
20000
25000
30000
35000
40000
45000
50000
60600
60700
60800
Capacity (HP)
175
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
Index data (ACC/DEC time, display coefficient)
15
14
13
12
Polarity
0: Positive (+),
EF
OU1
OU2
OU3
LU
Lin
FUS
Er7
OH1
OH2
OH3
Description
Overheat, DB resistor
Overload, motor 1
Overload, motor 2
Overload, drive
Capacity code
Capacity (HP)
0.07 (spare)
0.15 (spare)
0.25
0.5
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
1: Negative ( - )
Code
22
23
24
25
OC1
OC2
OC3
11
10
Index portion
0: 0.01
1: 0.1
2: 1
3: 10
X
X
X
X
Data portion
001999
00999
100999
100999
Example: If F07 (acceleration time 1) = 20.0 s

10.0 < 20< 99.9 index =1
20.0 = 0.1 X 200 0400H + 00C8H = 04C8H
12-5
(0.009.99)
(10.099.9)
(100999)
(10009990)
Data format [13]
Pattern operation
15
14
13
Direction
of rotation
Time
12
11
Index portion
0: 1st ACC/DEC time

1: 2nd ACC/DEC time
2: 3rd ACC/DEC time
3: 4th ACC/DEC time
0: FWD
1: REV
10
Data portion
0: 0.01
1: 0.1
2: 1
3: 10
X
X
X
X
001999
100999
100999
100999
(0.009.99)
(10.099.9)
(100999)
(10009990)
Example) If C22 (Stage1) = 10.0s R2 (10s, reverse rotation, acceleration time 2/deceleration time 2)
Since 10.0 = 0.1 X 100 > 9000H + 0400H + 0064H = 9464H
Data format [14]
15
14
13
RST
Operation command
12
11
10
9
0
X9
X8
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1 REV FWD
(All bit are ON by 1)

Example If S06 (operation command) = FWD, X1 and X5 = ON
0000 0000 0100 0101b = 0045H
Data format [15]
15
14
13
12
11
10
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
(All bit are ON by 1)

Example) If M15 (Universal output terminal)=Y1 and Y5 = ON
0000 0000 0001 0001b = 0011H
Data format [16]
15
14
13
BUSY
WR
Operating state
12
11
10
RL
ALM
DEC ACC
IL
VL
TL
12-6
NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
(All bit are ON or active by 1)

FWD: Forward operation
IL:
REV:0: Reverse operation
ACC:
EXT:
DC braking active (or pre-excitation) DEC:
ALM:
INT:
No Output
RL:
BRK: Braking active
WR:
NUV: DC link voltage is established
(undervoltage at 0)
TL:
Torque limiting
VL:
Voltage limiting
BUSY:
Data format [17]

15
14
Type code
13
12
11
Type
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
10
Generation
Type
G
P
-
Data format [18]
15
Current limiting
Under acceleration
Under deceleration
Drive fault
Transmission valid
Function writing privlege
0: Keypad panel
1: RS485
2: Fieldbus (option)
Processing data write
Generation
G11
-
Series
Series
USA
-
12
11
Data 4
Voltage series
230V three phase
460V three phase
575V three phase
-
10
Data 3
Data 2
Amperage value Decimal data (positive ):

Min. unit 0.01 inverter capacity is not more than 30HP
Min unit 0.01 for not less than 40HP
Example) If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)107.0A (40HP)
107.0 X 10=1070=042EH
If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)=3.60A (1HP)
Since 3.60 X 100=360=0168H
Voltage series
Data format [19]
Code
1
2
3
Code setting (14 figures)
13
Data format [20]
Transmission error code
Description
FC (function code) error
Illegal address
Illegal address (Data range error)
Code
71
72
73
Description
CRC error
(no response)
Parity error
(no response)
Other errors
(no response)
-Framing error
-Overrun error
-Buffer full error
NAK
-Priority for comm
-No privilege for writing error
-Forbidden writing error
12-7
Data 1
Data format [21]
Auto tuning
15
14
13
12
11
10
REV FWD
Data portion
0: Without forward rotation command
1: With forward rotation command.
0: Without reverse rotation command.
1: With reverse rotation command.
Example) If P04 (motor 1 auto - tuning)=1: Forward rotation

0000 0001 0000 0001b=0101H
12-7 Communication Errors
Exception Response
When the drive receives a message that does not contain communication errors but the message can not be processed,
the drive will return an exception response. The exception response contains an error sub-code in the data field that
represents the problem.
Exception Response Errors
Sub-Code
Name
1
Illegal Function
2
Illegal Data Address
3
7
Illegal Data Value

Negative Acknowledge
Causes
Received RTU Function other than 03, 06 or 16
The starting parameter address is an unused drive parameter..
The starting parameter address plus the offset refers to drive
parameter greater than the last parameter in a Function Code sort.
The number of registers is greater than 16.
Data contains an out of range value for a drive parameter
Requested data cannot be changed while the drive is running.
The drive parameter function is owned by the network interface
option card and cannot be changed.
Communication errors
Communication errors occur when the drive receives an invalid message. The drive will not return a response to a
communication error. A code that represents the last communication error is stored in drive parameter M26. Typical
communication message errors include parity, framing, and CRC errors.
12-8
13. Options
13.1 Built-in Options
The drive supports two internally mounted cards. One option card is mounted under the main cover (Location A) and
the other option card is mounted in a special adapter under the keypad (Location B). Only one card can be mounted
in these locations. There are two different types of option cards, Type 1 and Type 2. You cannot use two Type 1 or
Two Type 2 cards but you can mix any combination of Type 1 and Type 2 provided you only have one option per
mounting location. Each option card must be mounted in the designated location. The chart below lists the option
card, their types, and their mounting locations.
Name
Type Loc
2nd Option
Function
Type/Loc
2/B
Relay output card
The transistor output from the drive control output terminals Y1
and Y4 are converted to the relay output (1SPDT).
None
Frequency setting by binary code (max. 16 bits)
Monitoring (8 bits) of frequency, output current, and output
voltage
OPCG11SRY
(Relay output card)
OPCG11SDIO
(Digital interface card)
OPCG11SAIO
(Analog interface card)
None
Auxiliary input for analog frequency setting (0 to +/-10 V)

Monitoring of drive output frequency, current, and torque in
analog voltage, analog output 0-10 VDC abd 4-20mA
OPCG11SPG
(PG Feedback Card)
2/B
This will enable vector control by pulse generator feedback

signal
Proportional operation, tuning operation (12/15 V; A, B Signal)
OPCG11SPG2
(PG Feedback Card)
OPCG11SSY
(Synchronized operation
card)
OPCG11SCIO
(Interface card)
OPCG11SLON
(Communication card)
OPCG11SPDP
OPCG11SDEV
OPCG11SCOP
OPCG11SMBP
OPCG11SIBS
(Communcation card)
HE300GEN150
2/B
This will enable vector control by pulse generator feedback

signal
Proportional operation, tuning operation (5V; A, not A, B, not B
Signals)
Two motors are driven synchronously.
2/B
2/B
1/A
115 VAC Control input, an isolation amplifier,

relay output, PG encoder, analog output 4-20mA
Serial communication card for LonWorks
1/A
Serial communication card for Profibus-DP
1/A
Serial communication card for Device Net
1/A
Serial communication card for CAN
1/A
Serial commnication card for Modbus plus
1/A
Serial communcation card for Interbus-S
1/A
Serial communication card for Genius
13-1
Digital I/O interface card

OPCG11SDIO
4 Digital Inputs
Binary code input of max. 16 bits or BCD input (sink/source changeable)
3 Digital Outputs
Binary code output of max. 8 bits
Specifications Input
Digital signal input (4 points) by short-circuiting terminals L1, L16 and M1
<Sink>
ON operation current:
4.5 mA max.
OFF operation voltage:
27 V max.
<Source>
4.5 mA max.
27 V max.
Related function code:
o19, o20
Output
Digital signal output (3 points) by short-circuiting terminals between O1 to O6, and M2
<Sink>
50 mA max.
27 V max.
<Source>
-50 mA max.
27 V max.
Related function code:
o21
+24 Vdc (3.2 mA x 4 + 12.8 mA)
Power Source
Connection
Diagram
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
AF-300 G11S
Name
Type
Function
U
V
W
OPC-G11S-DIO
I16
O8(MSB)
I15
I14
O7
I13
I12
O6
I11
I10
O5
I9
I8
O4
I7
I6
O3
I5
I4
O2
I3
Sink
I2
O1(LSB)
I1(LSB)
M1
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
Ry
M2
CM
@ G
Remarks
Used to set frequency and give an indication of operation using binary coded decimals for PLC and CNC control algorithms
13-2
Name
Type
Function
Specifications
Connection
Diagram
PG feedback card (AF-300 G11 only)

OPCG11SPG2
To perform speed control by detecting motor rotating speed using a pulse generator
Speed Control Range:
Control
3 to 3600 rpm (for 4-pole motor)
Speed Control Accuracy:
0.02%
Starting Torque:
150% zero-speed (at ZERO signal ON) short time
Maximum Number of Input Pulse:
100 (kp/s)
Applicable
Output Pulse:
20 to 3000 P/R (A, not A, B, not B)
Encoder
PG Power Supply:
+5 Vdc 10%/200 mA
(Generator)
Maximum Response Frequency:
100 kHz
Input Terminal
PI:
PG external power supply input
PO:
PG power supply output
CM:
Common
YA:
Input feedback PG phase A (+) pulse
*YA:
Input feedback PG phase A (-) pulse
YB:
Input feedback PG phase B (+) pulse
*YB:
Input feedback PG phase B (-) pulse
+5 Vdc 10%/200 mA1
Power
Internal Power Supply:
Source
External Power Supply:
5 Vdc 10%
1
Use an external power supply when 200 mA is exceeded
I. Drive Internal Power Supply
L1/R
II. External Power Supply
L2 / S
L3 / T
L1 /R
L2/ S
L3/ T
G
PI D
Fe edba ck
Car d
PI D
Fe edba ck
Car d
PI
PI
J1
INT
V
W
J1
INT
EXT
PO
YA
* YA
YB
* YB
CM
EXT
PO
YA
* YA
YB
* YB
CM
PG
PG
5 Vdc 10%
Remarks
Full quadrature speed control with the primary signal and its complement to reduce the effect of electrical noise where required
13-3
Name
Type
Function
Specifications
PG feedback card ( AF-300 G11 only)

OPCG11SPG
To perform speed control by detecting motor rotating speed using a pulse generator
Control
1:1200 (3 to 3600 rpm)
Maximum Speed:
3600 rpm (120 Hz)
0.02%
Speed Control Response:
40 Hz
Applicable
No. of output pulses:
100 to 3000P/R A/B phase (incremental)
Encoder
Maximum response frequency:
100 kHz
(Generator)
Pulse output method:
Totem pole/open collector. Output current 7 mA or more.
Input Terminal
YA, YB, CM:
Connect A- and B-phase output signal from pulse generator on
feedback side
YZ, CM:
Output
Power Source
None
Internal power source: +15 Vdc 10% 120 mA, +12 Vdc 10% 120 mA (changeable on PC board1) (Terminal:
PO, CM)
External power source: +12 Vdc (-10%) to +15 Vdc (+1-%) / 300 mA or less2 (Terminal P1, CM)
1
Connection
Diagram
Connect Z-phase output signal from pulse generator on feedback

side. When the pulse generator does not have Z-phase, these
terminals need not be connected.
Use external power source when more than one PG feedback card is used and the total input current exceeds
120 mA
Take note that the power source matches the specifications of the applied pulse generator

L1 /R
L2/ S
L3 / T
L 1 /R
L 2 /S
L3 /T
W
G
G
PI D
Fe edba ck
Car d
a)12VDC
PI
PO
INT EXT
XA
J2
XB
15V 12V
XZ
b) 1 5 VDC CM
PO
J1
INT EXT YA
YB
J2
1 5 V 1 2 V YZ
CM
PI D
Fe edba ck
Car d
J1
J1
INT
J2
15V
PG
PI
PO
XA
XB
EX T
XZ
CM
12V
PO
YA
YB
YZ
CM
PG
1 2 VDC 10%
1 5 VDC 10%
The Jumper J2 can be connected to the 12V or 15V side.
Remarks
Terminals XA, XB and XZ are not in use unless used for a digital reference. They can be used for basic speed control and digital
follower control.
13-4
Name
Type
Function
Synchronized operation card ( AF-300 G11 only)

OPCG11SSY
To perform position control by pulse train input and synchronized operation of two motors with selectable functions (wait and
synchronize operation, simultaneous start and synchronize operation, and proportional speed ratio operation)
Specifications Control
1:1200 (3 to 3600 rpm)
Maximum Speed:
3600 rpm (120 Hz)
0.02%
Speed Control Response:
40 Hz
Applicable
No. of output pulses:
20 to 3000 P/R A/B phase (incremental)
Encoder
Maximum response frequency:
100 kHz
(Generator)
Wiring length:
100 m (totem pole)/20 (open collector)
Pulse output method:
totem pole/open collector, output current 7 mA or more
XA, XB, CM:
Connect A- and B-phase output signal of master rotary encoder
Input Terminal
XZ, CM:
Connect Z-phase output signal of master rotary encoder
YA, YB, CM:
Connect A- and B-phase output signal of feedback or master rotary
encoder
YZ, CM:
Connect Z-phase output signal of master rotary encoder
Output
None
Power Source 1 Use external power source when more than one PG feedback card is used and the total input current exceeds
120 mA
2
Take note that the power source matches the specifications of the applied rotary encoder
Connection
Diagram
Slave
side
Command
side
a) 12 Vdc
EXT
PO
EXT XA
XB
J2
15V 12V XZ
CM
Synchronous
option card
Synchronous
option card
PI
PO
YA
J2
YB
15V 12V
YZ
b) 15Vdc C M
Command
side
J1
INT
Slave side
J1
PG
I NT
J2
15 V
J1
INT
PG
PI
PO
YA
YB
EXT
YZ
CM
PG
12 V
PO
XA
XB
XZ
CM
PG
12Vdc 10%
15Vdc 10%
* Pin J2 may be connected on either the 12V or 15V side.
The above diagrams are used when the drive internal power source is used.
When using an external power source, perform connection similar to the above connection (see note 2) when using external power
suply of the PG feedback card.
Remarks
Synchronized speed control between two independently operated units utilizing the speed reference of a command
encoder. Allows for speed ratio setting.
13-5
Name
Type
Function
Analog I/O interface card

OPCG11SAIO
3 analog inputs (2 voltage inputs and 1 current input) to set a torque limiting value (driving, braking), frequency setting, and ratio
setting.
2 analog outputs (1 voltage output and 1 current output): 11 types of data can be output (ref. AF-300 G11/P11
function F30)
Analog signal input (3 points): 32 and 31, 22 and 21, C2 and 21
Terminal 32 - voltage input (both sides):
0 to 10 Vdc / 0 to 100%, input impedance: 22k ohm
Terminal 22 - voltage input (both sides):
0 to +10 Vdc / 0 to +100%, input impedance: 22k ohm
Terminal C2 - current input:
4 to + 20 mA dc / 0 to +100%, input impedance: 250k ohm
For voltage input, the power supply terminal for variable resistor (P10) should be connected
Related function code o22
Output
Analog signal output (2 points) between AO+ and AO-, CS+ and CSTerminal AO+:
Voltage output: 0 to 10 Vdc, for max. 2 voltmeters, input
impedance: 10k ohm
Terminal AO-:
Voltage output common
Terminal CS+:
Current output: 4 to 20 mA dc, max. 500 ohm impedance
Terminal CS-:
Current output common
Terminal CS- is isloated from terminal 21, 31, and AORelated function code o23
Connection
MCCB
or
Diagram
ELCB
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
U
V
W
(R0) *
30A
30B
30C
(T0) *
13
12
11 AF-3 0 0G 11
C1
RUN command
input
Y5A
Y5C
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
CM
E
PLC
FW
D
REV
CM
X1
X2
32
31
22
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
CM
VR
( 1k ohm)
VR
21
(1k ohm)
C2
(+)
Voltage input
(Both polarity)
Voltage input
(Single polarity)
Current input
(-)
AO+
AOCS+
FM
FM
A
P
DX
B
DX
A
SD
CS-
Analog voltmeter
Anammeter
E(G)
* Te rm i na ls [ R0 ] an d [ T0] ar e no t prov id ed f or 1.0 HP or s m aller.
Remarks
Used to trim operating speed and change torque limit levels using 0-10 Vdc signal, additional voltage, or 4-20 mA output
signal indicating unit's operation (ex. current, frequency, voltage, etc.)
13-6
Name
Type
Function
Relay output card

OPCG11SRY
Includes four relay output circuits
Converts transistor output signals from drive control output terminals Y1 to Y4 to relay (1SPDT) output signals
None
Output
Four-channel contact (12 terminals from Y1A to Y4C) 250 Vac, 0.3 A, cos dia. = 0.3 A
Power Source
The power source to drive the relay card is supplied from the drive
Connection
Diagram
+ 13Vdc
+ 24Vdc
Y1A
RY
Y1B
5G
CM
+13Vdc
Y1C
+24Vdc
Y2A
Connector
RY
Y2B
CM
5G
+13Vdc
Y2C
+24Vdc
Y3A
RY
Y3B
5G
CM
+13Vdc
Y3C
+24Vdc
Y4A
RY
Y4B
5G
CM
Remarks
Relay output contacts used in ac voltage control circuit logic
13-7
Y4C
Notes
13-8
14. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

14.1 General
In accordance with the provisions described in the European Commission Guidelines Document on Council Directive
89/336/EEC, GE Drives has chosen to classify the AF-300 G11 range of Drives as Complex Components.
Classification as a Complex Components allows a product to be treated as an apparatus, and thus permits
compliance with the essential requirements of the EMC Directive to be demonstrated to both an integrator of AF-300
G11 drives and to his customer or the installer and the user.
AF-300 G11 drive is supplied CE-marked, signifying compliance with EC Directive 89/336/EEC when fitted with
specified filter units installed and earthed in accordance with this sheet.
This Specification requires the following performance criteria to be met.
EMC product standard EN61800-/13/1997
Immunity: Second environment (Industrial environment)
Emision: First environment (Domestic environment)
Finally, it is the customers responsibility to check whether the equipment conforms to EMC directive.
14.2 Recommended Installation Instructions
It is necessary that to conform to the EMC Directive, these instructions must be followed.
Follow the usual safety procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical connections to the filter,
Drive and motor must be made by a qualified electrical technician.
1) Use the correct filter according to Table on page 6-39.
2) Install the Drive and filter in the electrically shielded metal wiring cabinet.
3) The back panel of the wiring cabinet should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter. Care should be
taken to remove any paint etc. from the mounting holes and face area of the panel. This will ensure the best
possible grounding of the filter.
4) Use the shield cable for the control , motor and other main wiring which are connected to the Drive. These shields
should be securely grounded.
5) It is important that all wire lengths are kept as short as possible and that incoming mains and outgoing motor
cables are kept well separated.
To minimize the conducted radio disturbance in the power distribution systems, the length of the motor-cable should
be as short as possible.
6) In the case where a ferrite ring is provided with the filter, fit the ferrite ring so the conductors pass through the
center of the ferrite. Wire the cable according to Fig.6 or Fig.7 , paying attention to the applied Drive type.
14-1
Applied Drive AF-300G11

[Hp] Max. rated voltage 3 Phase 230 VAC
Tested Motor
Filter Type
Cable Length
G11
(Fuji model #)
Rated
EN55011 EN55011
Current Class B
Class A
0.25
EFL075SP2
0.5
6A
(EFL-0.75SP-2)
1
2
EFL370SP2
3
164 ft
25A
(EFL-3.7SP-2)
5
(50m)
7.5
EFL750SP2
50A
(EFL-7.5SP-2)
10
15
EFL150SP2
100A
(EFL-15SP-2)
20
25
EFL220SP2
150A
(EFL-22SP-2)
30
40
RF3180F11
(RF3180-F11)
50
60
75
100
125
RF3280F11
(RF3280-F11)
180A
400A
[HP] Max. rated voltage 3 Phase 480 VAC

0.5
EFL075G114
5A
(EFL-0.75G11-4)
1
2
EFL400G114
3
12A
(EFL-4.0G11-4)
5
7.5
33 ft
EFL750G114
10
(10m)
35A
(EFL-7.5G11-4)
EFL150G114
(EFL-15G11-4)
EFL220G114
(EFL-22G11-4)
40
RF3100F11
(RF3100-F11)
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
328 Ft
(100m)
164 ft
(50m)
50A
72A
100A
RF3180F11
(RF3180-F11)
180A
RF3280F11
(RF3280-F11)
280A
RF3400F11
(RF3400-F11)
400A
RF3880F11
(RF3880-F11)
Dimensions
L x W x H (mm)
Mount. Dim.
Y x X (mm)
9.57 x3.35x3.66
(243x85x93)
8.98x2.32
(228x59)
OF1 [1]
3.3
9.17x4.13x5.35
(233x105x136)
8.46x 3.15
(215x80)
OF2 [1]
5.5
10.75x4.72x6.22
(273x120x158)
10x3.74
(254x95)
OF2 [1]
11.0
20.2x8.07x7.6
(513x205x193)
19.17x6.30
(487x160)
OF3 [1]
44.1
19.49x7.87x6.3
(495x200x160)
18.4x6.53
(468x166)
48.7
60
48.7
120
220
280A
RF3400F11
(RF3400-F11)
15
20
25
30
RFI Filter Data
800A
23.11x9.84x8.07
(587x250x205)
22.05x3.35
(560x85)
110
12.6x4.56x1.65
(320x116x42)
11.54x3.54
(293x90)
2.0
12.6x6.1x1.77
(320x155x45)
11.54x4.13
(293x105)
2.6
13.43x8.86x1.87
(341x225x47.5)
12.24x6.57
(311x167)
4.0
19.69x9.84x2.76
(500x250x70)
17.68x7.28
(449x185)
7.9
8.8
17.13x7.87x5.19
(435x200x130)
16.06x6.54
(408x166)
28.6
19.49x7.87x6.3
(495x200x160)
328 ft
(100m)
Ferrite
Total
Ring (Qty) Wt. (lb)
23.11x9.84x8.07
(587x250x205)
27.09x14.33x7.09
(688x364x180)
14-2
18.4x6.53
(468x166)
22.05x3.35
(560x85)
25.51x5.91
(648x150)
Watt
loss [W]
0.4
1.4
5.1
3.9
8.2
21
24
40
42
68
74
99
0.8
3.1
3.1
6.9
18
10
17
24
29
49
47
62
48.7
60
84.8
120
110
220
130
180
142
Fig. 1
Separate
Type
Fig. 3
Separate
Type
Fig. 4
Separate
Type
Fig. 2
Separate/
Integral
Type
21
F200
160
[3]
Note
180
Fig. 3
Separate
Type
Fig. 4
Separate
Type
Fig. 5
Separate
Type
Ferrite Ring Dimensions: in (mm)

Part No.
D
H
OF1
0.98 (25)
2.01 (51)
OF2
1.61 (41)
2.80 (71)
OF3
2.83 (72) 3.94 (100)
Figure 1
Figure 2
14-3
T
0.67 (17)
0.71 (18)
1.06 (27)
W1
Dimensions: in (mm)
H
H1
RF3100-F11
7.87 (200)
6.54 (166)
17.1 (435)
16.1 (408)
5.12 (130)
RF3180-F11
7.87 (200)
6.54 (166)
19.5 (495)
18.4 (468)
6.30 (160)
Filter Type
Figure 3 Outline Dimensions (RF3100-F11, RF3180-F11)
Figure 4 Outline Dimensions (RF3280-F11, RF3400-F11)
14-4
Figure 5 Outline Dimensions (RF3880-F11)
Figure 6
230V all Hp
460V less than 350 Hp
14-5
Figure 7
AF-300 G11 460V 400 Hp and higher
14-6

41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062
www.geelectrical.com
AF-300 G11 Users Guide
AF-300 G11
Users Guide
GEI-100363D
GEI-100363D
Supersedes GEI-100363C
070725
FERGADV

Ge Af300 LV VFD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ge Af300 LV VFD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ge Af300 LV VFD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Consumer & Industrial

GE Consumer & Industrial

GE Consumer & Industrial

AF-300 G11 Users Guide

2007 by GE Drives, Inc.

AF-300 G11 is a trademark of GE Drives, Inc.

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

Setting Function Data ..................................... 4-5

Standard Specifications ..................................... 11-1

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

Improper operation may result in serious personal injury or death.

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

Instructions on Maintenance, Inspection, and Replacement

Instructions for UL/cUL Requirements

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

AF-300 G11 Model Numbering System Diagram

AF-300 Drive Family

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

AF-300 G11 Dimensions & Weights

Rated Output Overload

230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 1

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

15.75 x 9.84 x 7.68

230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 4

230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 12

230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

AF-300 G11 Dimensions & Weights

Rated Output Overload

230VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open with NEMA 12 Heatsink

21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

10.24 x 4.33 x 5.12

460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 1

460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 4

460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, NEMA 12

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

AF-300 G11 Dimensions & Weights

Rated Output Overload

460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open

21.7 x 13.4 x 10.0

460VAC, 3 phase, 50/60Hz Input, Open with NEMA 12 Heatsink

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

1. Before Using This Product

Check the ratings nameplate to confirm that the

Check for damaged and/or missing parts upon delivery.

Data subject to change without notice 7/07. 2007 GE Drives

40 HP or more Surface Cover

1.3 Handling the Product

Fig.1-3-1 Removing the Cover (for drives of 30HP or less)

Mounting screws of service

Fig.1-3-2 Removing the Cover (for drives of 40HP or more)

(2) Removing the Keypad Panel